TWI709817B - Pattern manufacturing method, semiconductor device manufacturing method, and laminate - Google Patents

Pattern manufacturing method, semiconductor device manufacturing method, and laminate Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI709817B
TWI709817B TW106118077A TW106118077A TWI709817B TW I709817 B TWI709817 B TW I709817B TW 106118077 A TW106118077 A TW 106118077A TW 106118077 A TW106118077 A TW 106118077A TW I709817 B TWI709817 B TW I709817B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
group
transparent substrate
pattern
photosensitive resin
formula
Prior art date
Application number
TW106118077A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TW201807495A (en
Inventor
犬島孝能
沢野充
前原佳紀
Original Assignee
日商富士軟片股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 日商富士軟片股份有限公司 filed Critical 日商富士軟片股份有限公司
Publication of TW201807495A publication Critical patent/TW201807495A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI709817B publication Critical patent/TWI709817B/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/038Macromolecular compounds which are rendered insoluble or differentially wettable
    • G03F7/0387Polyamides or polyimides
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/16Coating processes; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/168Finishing the coated layer, e.g. drying, baking, soaking
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/2002Exposure; Apparatus therefor with visible light or UV light, through an original having an opaque pattern on a transparent support, e.g. film printing, projection printing; by reflection of visible or UV light from an original such as a printed image
    • G03F7/2012Exposure; Apparatus therefor with visible light or UV light, through an original having an opaque pattern on a transparent support, e.g. film printing, projection printing; by reflection of visible or UV light from an original such as a printed image using liquid photohardening compositions, e.g. for the production of reliefs such as flexographic plates or stamps
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/26Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/40Treatment after imagewise removal, e.g. baking
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L21/00Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/02Manufacture or treatment of semiconductor devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/027Making masks on semiconductor bodies for further photolithographic processing not provided for in group H01L21/18 or H01L21/34
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L23/00Details of semiconductor or other solid state devices
    • H01L23/12Mountings, e.g. non-detachable insulating substrates
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K3/00Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits
    • H05K3/10Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which conductive material is applied to the insulating support in such a manner as to form the desired conductive pattern

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Exposure And Positioning Against Photoresist Photosensitive Materials (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Photosensitive Polymer And Photoresist Processing (AREA)

Abstract

本發明提供一種能夠從積層體直接剝離透明基板的圖案製造方法、半導體裝置的製造方法及積層體,該積層體具有透明基板和位於上述透明基板的表面之樹脂圖案(例如,絕緣層)。本發明的圖案製造方法包括剝離製程,該剝離製程中從積層體的透明基板側對積層體照射輻射光而從積層體剝離透明基板,該積層體具有透明基板和位於透明基板的表面之樹脂圖案,且樹脂圖案包含選自聚醯亞胺及聚苯并噁唑中之至少一種,所照射的輻射光的波長中的樹脂圖案的吸光度係0.5以上。The present invention provides a pattern manufacturing method capable of directly peeling a transparent substrate from a laminate, a semiconductor device manufacturing method, and a laminate, the laminate having a transparent substrate and a resin pattern (for example, an insulating layer) on the surface of the transparent substrate. The pattern manufacturing method of the present invention includes a peeling process in which the layered body is irradiated with radiation from the transparent substrate side of the layered body to peel the transparent substrate from the layered body, and the layered body has a transparent substrate and a resin pattern on the surface of the transparent substrate , And the resin pattern includes at least one selected from polyimide and polybenzoxazole, and the absorbance of the resin pattern in the wavelength of the irradiated radiation is 0.5 or more.

Description

圖案製造方法、半導體裝置的製造方法及積層體Pattern manufacturing method, semiconductor device manufacturing method, and laminate

本發明涉及一種圖案製造方法、半導體裝置的製造方法及積層體。The present invention relates to a pattern manufacturing method, a semiconductor device manufacturing method, and a laminate.

因近年來針對半導體裝置的高集成化、小型化的要求,扇出型晶圓級封裝(FOWLP)受到矚目。關於FOWLP,一般為在半導體晶片上交替積層絕緣層和再配線層(RDL:Redistribution layer)的結構。絕緣層材料中常使用感光性聚醯亞胺,再配線層材料中常使用銅。 近年來,再配線層的數量呈增加的趨勢,而且還存在以4層聚醯亞胺、3層再配線層的多層形成半導體晶片與凸塊之間的情況。In recent years, due to the requirements for high integration and miniaturization of semiconductor devices, fan-out wafer level packaging (FOWLP) has attracted attention. FOWLP generally has a structure in which an insulating layer and a redistribution layer (RDL: Redistribution layer) are alternately laminated on a semiconductor wafer. Photosensitive polyimide is often used in the insulating layer material, and copper is often used in the rewiring layer material. In recent years, the number of redistribution layers has been increasing, and there are cases in which multiple layers of four polyimide and three redistribution layers form the semiconductor wafer and bumps.

於此,作為FOWLP,準備將半導體晶片排列在晶圓狀支撐體者(仿真晶圓),於模壓成型形成再配線層,並切斷仿真晶圓的方式(晶片優先(chip first))和在晶圓狀支撐體上首次形成再配線層,在其上排列半導體晶片,並於模壓成型後進行切斷的方式(第一RDL)這兩個方式。 通常,再配線層的數量越增加則製造成品率越降低,但若在晶片優先方式中產生再配線層的不良,則半導體晶片變多餘,相對於此,在RDL優先方式中能夠於晶片連接前檢查配線層,並僅於良品部位與晶片連接,因此半導體晶片不會變多餘。因此作為降低製造成本之方法,對RDL優先方式的期待變高。Here, as FOWLP, prepare to arrange semiconductor wafers on a wafer-like support (simulation wafer), form a rewiring layer by compression molding, and cut the virtual wafer (chip first) and in A rewiring layer is formed on a wafer-like support for the first time, semiconductor chips are arranged on it, and cut after compression molding (first RDL). Generally, the more the number of rewiring layers increases, the more the manufacturing yield decreases. However, if defects in the rewiring layers occur in the wafer priority method, the semiconductor wafer becomes redundant. In contrast, the RDL priority method can be used before the wafer connection Check the wiring layer and connect to the chip only at the good parts, so the semiconductor chip will not become redundant. Therefore, as a method of reducing manufacturing costs, expectations for the RDL priority method have increased.

依這種狀況,專利文獻1中記載有“於玻璃板上,設置有主要包括熱塑性聚醯亞胺樹脂之剝離層。於剝離層上形成第1絕緣層。藉由濺射,於第1絕緣層50上形成包括TiN、Ti及Cu之導體層。308nm的雷射光透過玻璃板而照射於剝離層,從而剝離層被軟化。玻璃板被剝離。”。 又,專利文獻2中揭示了“一種形成電結構之方法,該方法具有如下,亦即準備包括第1電元件之第1裝置晶圓,第1裝置晶圓於第1裝置晶圓的第1面具有第1電極,於上述第1裝置晶圓的上述第1面使用第1接合材料與載體晶圓接合,上述載體晶圓於與上述第1裝置晶圓接合之情況下直接對上述第1裝置晶圓的第2面進行處理,使來自雷射的光透過上述載體晶圓而與上述第1接合材料抵接,上述第1接合材料藉由吸收來自光束的能量而上述第1接合材料使上述載體晶圓從上述第1裝置晶圓實質性地釋放,上述載體晶圓相對於來自上述雷射的上述光實質上呈透明,從上述第1裝置晶圓去除上述載體晶圓,且從上述第1裝置晶圓去除殘存的第1接合材料。”。 [先前技術文獻] [專利文獻]Under this situation, Patent Document 1 states that "a release layer mainly composed of a thermoplastic polyimide resin is provided on a glass plate. A first insulating layer is formed on the release layer. The first insulating layer is formed by sputtering. A conductor layer including TiN, Ti, and Cu is formed on the layer 50. The 308nm laser light penetrates the glass plate and irradiates the peeling layer, so that the peeling layer is softened. The glass plate is peeled.". In addition, Patent Document 2 discloses "a method of forming an electrical structure. The method has the following steps: a first device wafer including a first electrical element is prepared, and the first device wafer is placed on the first device wafer. The surface has a first electrode, and the first surface of the first device wafer is bonded to a carrier wafer using a first bonding material. When the carrier wafer is bonded to the first device wafer, it directly faces the first device wafer. The second surface of the device wafer is processed so that the light from the laser is transmitted through the carrier wafer and abuts against the first bonding material. The first bonding material absorbs energy from the light beam and the first bonding material makes The carrier wafer is substantially released from the first device wafer, the carrier wafer is substantially transparent to the light from the laser, the carrier wafer is removed from the first device wafer, and the carrier wafer is removed from the first device wafer. The first device wafer removes the remaining first bonding material.". [Prior Art Document] [Patent Document]

專利文獻1:日本特開2014-011289號公報 專利文獻2:國際公開WO2014/037829號公報Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-011289 Patent Document 2: International Publication No. WO2014/037829

對上述專利文獻1及2進行研究之結果,均為從透明基板側照射輻射光,並於剝離層與透明基板的界面進行剝離之方式。因此,除了絕緣層,還需要剝離層。本發明的目的在於解決所述課題,且目的在於提供一種能夠從積層體直接剝離透明基板的圖案製造方法以及半導體裝置的製造方法及積層體,該積層體具有透明基板和位於上述透明基板的表面的樹脂圖案(例如,絕緣層)。As a result of studying the above-mentioned Patent Documents 1 and 2, both are methods in which radiant light is irradiated from the side of the transparent substrate, and peeling is performed at the interface between the peeling layer and the transparent substrate. Therefore, in addition to the insulating layer, a peeling layer is also required. The object of the present invention is to solve the above-mentioned problems, and the object is to provide a pattern manufacturing method capable of directly peeling a transparent substrate from a laminate, a method of manufacturing a semiconductor device, and a laminate, the laminate having a transparent substrate and a surface on the transparent substrate Resin pattern (for example, insulating layer).

依所述狀況,本發明者進行研究之結果,發現藉由如下可解決上述課題,亦即,照射輻射光來從具有透明基板和位於其表面的樹脂圖案之積層體剝離透明基板時,將輻射光的波長中的樹脂圖案的吸光度調整為0.5以上,且作為構成樹脂圖案之樹脂,藉由利用選自聚醯亞胺及聚苯并噁唑中之樹脂,可解決上述課題。具體而言,藉由下述方法<1>,較佳為藉由<2>~<13>解決了上述課題。 <1>一種圖案製造方法,其包括剝離製程,從積層體A的透明基板側對上述積層體A照射輻射光而從上述積層體A剝離透明基板,該積層體A具有透明基板和位於上述透明基板的表面之樹脂圖案,上述樹脂圖案包含選自聚醯亞胺及聚苯并噁唑中之至少一種,所照射之上述輻射光的波長中的上述樹脂圖案的吸光度係0.5以上。 <2>如<1>所述之圖案製造方法,對具有透明基板和感光性樹脂膜之積層體B的感光性樹脂膜進行曝光,進而進行顯影處理而去除感光性樹脂膜的一部分來得到上述積層體A。 <3>如<2>所述之圖案製造方法,去除上述感光性樹脂膜的一部分而形成的樹脂圖案中被去除之部分的表面積係上述感光性樹脂膜被曝光的總區域的表面積的20%以下。 <4>如<2>或<3>所述之圖案製造方法,上述曝光從上述積層體B的感光性樹脂膜側進行。 <5>如<1>至<4>中任一項所述之圖案製造方法,其具有如下製程,在上述積層體A的透明基板上的上述樹脂圖案的間隙或透明基板上的透明基板與樹脂圖案之間應用金屬。 <6>如<5>所述之圖案製造方法,上述金屬包含選自銅、鋁、鎳、釩、鈦、鉭、鉻、鈷、金、銀及鎢中之至少一種。 <7>如<2>至<6>中任一項所述之圖案製造方法,上述感光性樹脂膜包含選自聚醯亞胺前驅物、聚醯亞胺、聚苯并噁唑前驅物及聚苯并噁唑中之至少一種。 <8>如<2>至<6>中任一項所述之圖案製造方法,上述感光性樹脂膜包含選自聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物中之至少一種。 <9>如<1>至<8>中任一項所述之圖案製造方法,在上述曝光顯影製程後且在剝離製程前包括對上述樹脂圖案進行硬化之硬化製程。 <10>如<2>至<9>中任一項所述之圖案製造方法,上述顯影係負型顯影。 <11>一種半導體裝置的製造方法,其包括<1>至<10>中任一項所述之圖案製造方法。 <12>一種積層體,其具有透明基板、位於上述透明基板的表面之樹脂圖案及位於上述透明基板的表面上的上述樹脂圖案的間隙中的金屬,上述樹脂圖案包含選自聚醯亞胺及聚苯并噁唑中的至少一種。 <13>一種積層體,其具有透明基板、位於上述透明基板的表面的樹脂圖案、位於上述透明基板的表面上的上述樹脂圖案的間隙中的金屬及與上述金屬相接之半導體元件,上述半導體元件在與透明基板側相反一側與上述金屬相接,上述樹脂圖案包含選自聚醯亞胺及聚苯并噁唑中之至少一種。 [發明效果]Based on the situation, the inventors of the present invention have conducted research and found that the above-mentioned problem can be solved by irradiating radiation to peel off the transparent substrate from the laminate having the transparent substrate and the resin pattern on the surface. The absorbance of the resin pattern in the wavelength of light is adjusted to 0.5 or more, and the above-mentioned problem can be solved by using a resin selected from polyimide and polybenzoxazole as the resin constituting the resin pattern. Specifically, the above-mentioned problem is solved by the following method <1>, preferably by <2> to <13>. <1> A pattern manufacturing method, including a peeling process, irradiating the layered body A with radiation from the transparent substrate side of the layered body A to peel the transparent substrate from the layered body A. The layered body A has a transparent substrate and a transparent substrate located on the transparent substrate. The resin pattern on the surface of the substrate, the resin pattern includes at least one selected from polyimide and polybenzoxazole, and the absorbance of the resin pattern in the wavelength of the radiated light is 0.5 or more. <2> The pattern manufacturing method as described in <1>, which is obtained by exposing the photosensitive resin film of the laminate B having a transparent substrate and a photosensitive resin film, and then performing a development process to remove a part of the photosensitive resin film. Layered body A. <3> The pattern manufacturing method described in <2>, in which the surface area of the removed portion of the resin pattern formed by removing a part of the photosensitive resin film is 20% of the surface area of the total exposed area of the photosensitive resin film the following. <4> The pattern manufacturing method as described in <2> or <3>, wherein the exposure is performed from the photosensitive resin film side of the laminate B. <5> The pattern manufacturing method as described in any one of <1> to <4>, which has a process in which the gap between the resin pattern on the transparent substrate of the laminate A or the transparent substrate on the transparent substrate and Metal is applied between the resin patterns. <6> The pattern manufacturing method according to <5>, wherein the metal includes at least one selected from copper, aluminum, nickel, vanadium, titanium, tantalum, chromium, cobalt, gold, silver, and tungsten. <7> The pattern manufacturing method according to any one of <2> to <6>, wherein the photosensitive resin film includes a precursor selected from the group consisting of polyimide, polyimide, polybenzoxazole, and At least one of polybenzoxazole. <8> The pattern manufacturing method according to any one of <2> to <6>, wherein the photosensitive resin film contains at least one selected from a polyimide precursor and a polybenzoxazole precursor. <9> The pattern manufacturing method according to any one of <1> to <8>, after the exposure and development process and before the peeling process, includes a curing process for curing the resin pattern. <10> The pattern manufacturing method according to any one of <2> to <9>, wherein the development is negative-type development. <11> A method of manufacturing a semiconductor device, including the pattern manufacturing method described in any one of <1> to <10>. <12> A laminate having a transparent substrate, a resin pattern located on the surface of the transparent substrate, and a metal in the gaps between the resin pattern on the surface of the transparent substrate, the resin pattern including a polyimide and At least one of polybenzoxazole. <13> A laminate having a transparent substrate, a resin pattern on the surface of the transparent substrate, a metal in the gaps of the resin pattern on the surface of the transparent substrate, a semiconductor element in contact with the metal, and the semiconductor The element is in contact with the metal on the side opposite to the transparent substrate side, and the resin pattern includes at least one selected from polyimide and polybenzoxazole. [Invention Effect]

依本發明,能夠提供一種能夠從積層體直接剝離透明基板的圖案製造方法以及半導體裝置的製造方法及積層體,該積層體具有透明基板和位於上述透明基板的表面的樹脂圖案。 【圖示簡單說明】According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a pattern manufacturing method capable of directly peeling a transparent substrate from a laminate, a method of manufacturing a semiconductor device, and a laminate having a transparent substrate and a resin pattern on the surface of the transparent substrate. [Illustration brief description]

圖1係表示第1實施方式之示意圖。 圖2係表示第2實施方式之示意圖。 圖3係表示第3實施方式之示意圖。Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the first embodiment. Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the second embodiment. Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a third embodiment.

以下所記載之本發明中的構成要件的說明有時基於本發明的代表性實施方式而進行,但本發明並不限定於該種實施方式。 關於本說明書中的基團(原子團)的標記,未記錄經取代及未經取代之標記係同時具有不具有取代基者和具有取代基者。例如,“烷基”不僅包含不具有取代基之烷基(未經取代的烷基),還包含具有取代基之烷基(取代烷基)。 本說明書中“曝光”只要無特別限定,除了利用光的曝光以外,利用電子束、離子束等粒子束之描繪亦包含於曝光中。又,作為使用於曝光之光,通常可列舉以水銀燈的明線光譜、準分子雷射為代表之遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X射線、電子束等活性光線或放射線。 本說明書中,利用“~”表示之數值範圍是指將記載於“~”前後之數值作為下限值及上限值而包含之範圍。 本說明書中,“(甲基)丙烯酸酯”表示“丙烯酸酯”及“甲基丙烯酸酯”這兩者或任一個,“(甲基)烯丙基”表示“烯丙基”及“甲基烯丙基”這兩者或任一個,“(甲基)丙烯酸”表示“丙烯酸”及“甲基丙烯酸”這兩者或任一個,“(甲基)丙烯醯基”表示“丙烯醯基”及“甲基丙烯醯基”這兩者或任一個。 本說明書中,“製程”這一術語,不僅是獨立的製程,而且即使於能夠與其他製程明確區分之情況下,若可實現對該製程所期待之作用,則亦包含於本術語中。 本說明書中,固體成分濃度係相對於組成物的總質量中除了溶劑以外的成分的質量百分率。又,只要沒有特別記載,則固體成分濃度是指25℃下的濃度。 本說明書中,只要沒有特別記載,則重量平均分子量(Mw)及數平均分子量(Mn)依照凝膠滲透色譜法(GPC測定),且作為苯乙烯換算值而定義。本說明書中,重量平均分子量(Mw)及數平均分子量(Mn)例如能夠利用HLC-8220(TOSOH CORPORATION製),並作為柱而使用保護柱HZ-L、TSKgel Super HZM-M、TSKgel Super HZ4000、TSKgel Super HZ3000、TSKgel Super HZ2000(TOSOH CORPORATION製)而求出。只要沒有特別記載,則將洗提液設為利用THF(四氫呋喃)測定者。又,只要沒有特別記載,則將檢測設為使用UV線(紫外線)的波長254nm檢測器者。The description of the constituent elements in the present invention described below may be performed based on a representative embodiment of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. Regarding the label of the group (atomic group) in this specification, it is not recorded that substituted and unsubstituted labels have both unsubstituted and substituted labels. For example, "alkyl" includes not only unsubstituted alkyl groups (unsubstituted alkyl groups) but also substituted alkyl groups (substituted alkyl groups). As long as "exposure" in this specification is not particularly limited, in addition to exposure with light, drawing with particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams is also included in exposure. In addition, as the light used for exposure, active rays or radiation such as extreme ultraviolet, extreme ultraviolet (EUV light), X-rays, electron beams, etc. represented by the bright-ray spectrum of mercury lamps and excimer lasers are usually cited. In this specification, the numerical range indicated by "-" refers to the range that includes the numerical values described before and after "-" as the lower limit and the upper limit. In this specification, "(meth)acrylate" means either or both of "acrylate" and "methacrylate", and "(meth)allyl" means "allyl" and "methyl Both or either "allyl", "(meth)acrylic" means both or either of "acrylic" and "methacrylic", and "(meth)acryloyl" means "acryloyl" And "methacryloyl" either or both. In this specification, the term "process" is not only an independent process, but even if it can be clearly distinguished from other processes, if it can achieve the expected effect of the process, it is also included in this term. In this specification, the solid content concentration is the mass percentage of components other than the solvent in the total mass of the composition. In addition, unless otherwise stated, the solid content concentration means the concentration at 25°C. In this specification, unless otherwise stated, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) are defined as styrene conversion values in accordance with gel permeation chromatography (GPC measurement). In this specification, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) can be, for example, HLC-8220 (manufactured by TOSOH CORPORATION), and guard columns HZ-L, TSKgel Super HZM-M, TSKgel Super HZ4000, TSKgel Super HZ3000, TSKgel Super HZ2000 (manufactured by TOSOH CORPORATION). As long as there is no special description, the eluent is measured with THF (tetrahydrofuran). In addition, as long as there is no special description, the detection is to use a UV ray (ultraviolet) wavelength 254 nm detector.

本發明的圖案製造方法的特徵在於包括剝離製程,該剝離製程中從積層體A(以下,有時簡稱為“具有透明基板和樹脂圖案之積層體”)的透明基板側對積層體照射輻射光而從上述積層體A剝離透明基板,該積層體A具有透明基板和位於上述透明基板的表面之樹脂圖案,且上述樹脂圖案包含選自聚醯亞胺及聚苯并噁唑中之至少一種,上述所照射之輻射光的波長中的上述樹脂圖案的吸光度係0.5以上。其理由如下,亦即作為樹脂圖案使用選自聚醯亞胺及聚苯并噁唑中之至少一種樹脂,能夠提高相對於輻射光的耐久性。進而,以所照射之輻射光的波長中的樹脂圖案的吸光度成為0.5以上之方式進行照射,並藉由輻射光的吸收,樹脂圖案的透明基板附近局部發熱,因此能夠避免因樹脂圖案整體發熱而導致之膜質劣化的同時能夠於該面基板界面進行燒蝕,能夠從具有透明基板和樹脂圖案之積層體直接剝離透明基板,且於樹脂圖案與透明基板之間不需要剝離層等。 尤其,本發明的圖案製造方法中,相對於具有透明基板和感光性樹脂膜之積層體B,藉由波長500nm以下的光對具有透明基板和樹脂圖案之積層體A進行曝光,進而較佳地使用於可進行顯影處理之方式中。亦即,對具有透明基板和感光性樹脂膜之積層體B(較佳為具有透明基板和位於上述透明基板的表面之感光性樹脂膜之積層體)進行曝光顯影,使感光性樹脂膜失去感光性,藉此即使於形成有樹脂圖案之情況下,以滿足規定條件之方式照射輻射光,藉此不對樹脂圖案賦予損傷就能夠從具有透明基板和樹脂圖案之積層體A適當地剝離透明基板。The pattern manufacturing method of the present invention is characterized by including a peeling process in which the layered body is irradiated with radiation light from the transparent substrate side of the layered body A (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "layered body with transparent substrate and resin pattern") And peeling the transparent substrate from the laminate A, the laminate A has a transparent substrate and a resin pattern on the surface of the transparent substrate, and the resin pattern includes at least one selected from polyimide and polybenzoxazole, The absorbance of the resin pattern in the wavelength of the irradiated radiation light is 0.5 or more. The reason for this is that at least one resin selected from the group consisting of polyimide and polybenzoxazole is used as the resin pattern to improve the durability against radiated light. Furthermore, it is irradiated so that the absorbance of the resin pattern in the wavelength of the irradiated radiation becomes 0.5 or more, and by the absorption of the radiated light, the vicinity of the transparent substrate of the resin pattern generates heat locally, so that the entire resin pattern can be prevented from heating up. The resulting film quality can be ablated at the interface between the substrate and the substrate. The transparent substrate can be peeled off directly from the laminate with the transparent substrate and the resin pattern, and there is no need for a peeling layer between the resin pattern and the transparent substrate. In particular, in the pattern manufacturing method of the present invention, with respect to the laminated body B having the transparent substrate and the photosensitive resin film, the laminated body A having the transparent substrate and the resin pattern is exposed by light having a wavelength of 500 nm or less, and more preferably Used in a way that can be developed. That is, the laminate B having a transparent substrate and a photosensitive resin film (preferably a laminate having a transparent substrate and a photosensitive resin film on the surface of the transparent substrate) is exposed and developed, so that the photosensitive resin film loses its sensitivity By this, even when the resin pattern is formed, the radiant light is irradiated in a manner that satisfies the prescribed conditions, and thereby the transparent substrate can be properly peeled from the laminate A having the transparent substrate and the resin pattern without damage to the resin pattern.

以下,依圖式對本發明的實施方式進行說明。本發明的結構並不限定於圖式中所記載之結構是毋庸置疑的。Hereinafter, the embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. There is no doubt that the structure of the present invention is not limited to the structure described in the drawings.

圖1係表示第1實施方式之示意圖,於透明基板1上設置感光性樹脂膜2(感光性樹脂膜製造製程),並進行曝光顯影而製造樹脂圖案3(曝光顯影製程)。然後,以滿足規定條件之方式照射輻射光,藉此能夠剝離透明基板1(透明基板剝離製程)。 進而,在上述曝光顯影製程之後,於透明基板1上(較佳為表面)的樹脂圖案3的間隙或透明基板1上的透明基板1與樹脂圖案3之間,能夠應用金屬4(金屬應用製程)。此外,能夠以與金屬4相接的方式應用半導體元件5(半導體元件應用製程)。 本實施方式中,尤其以感光性樹脂膜製造製程、曝光顯影製程、金屬應用製程、半導體元件應用製程、透明基板剝離製程的順序進行為較佳。 第1實施方式中,金屬(例如,金屬配線或電極)位於樹脂圖案(例如,絕緣層)的間隙,進而可得到具有與上述金屬相接的半導體元件(例如,半導體晶片)之半導體裝置。以下,對第1實施方式進行更具體的說明。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the first embodiment. A photosensitive resin film 2 is provided on a transparent substrate 1 (photosensitive resin film manufacturing process), and exposure and development are performed to manufacture a resin pattern 3 (exposure and development process). Then, the radiant light is irradiated in a manner that satisfies prescribed conditions, whereby the transparent substrate 1 can be peeled off (transparent substrate peeling process). Furthermore, after the above-mentioned exposure and development process, in the gap between the resin pattern 3 on the transparent substrate 1 (preferably the surface) or between the transparent substrate 1 and the resin pattern 3 on the transparent substrate 1, the metal 4 can be applied (metal application process ). In addition, the semiconductor element 5 can be applied in a manner of being in contact with the metal 4 (semiconductor element application process). In this embodiment, it is particularly preferable to proceed in the order of the photosensitive resin film manufacturing process, the exposure and development process, the metal application process, the semiconductor element application process, and the transparent substrate peeling process. In the first embodiment, a metal (for example, metal wiring or electrode) is located in a gap between a resin pattern (for example, an insulating layer), and a semiconductor device having a semiconductor element (for example, a semiconductor wafer) in contact with the metal can be obtained. Hereinafter, the first embodiment will be described in more detail.

<感光性樹脂膜製造製程> 感光性樹脂膜2藉由於透明基板1上,較佳為於表面上,以層狀應用感光性樹脂組成物而得到。進而,當感光性樹脂組成物包含溶劑時,以層狀應用感光性樹脂組成物之後,進行乾燥為較佳。 又,感光性樹脂膜的厚度係0.1~100μm為較佳,1~50μm為更佳,3~20μm為進一步較佳。<Photosensitive resin film manufacturing process> The photosensitive resin film 2 is obtained by applying a photosensitive resin composition in a layer form on the transparent substrate 1, preferably on the surface. Furthermore, when the photosensitive resin composition contains a solvent, it is preferable to dry after applying the photosensitive resin composition in a layered form. In addition, the thickness of the photosensitive resin film is preferably 0.1 to 100 μm, more preferably 1 to 50 μm, and more preferably 3 to 20 μm.

<<透明基板>> 透明基板只要是透過輻射光之基板,則其種類等並無特別限定,可例示玻璃、石英、液晶聚合物等,玻璃為較佳。 又,透明基板的耐熱性較高為較佳,Tg係150℃以上為較佳,250℃以上為更佳。 透明基板的厚度並無特別限定,通常係10~1000μm。<<Transparent substrate>> As long as the transparent substrate is a substrate that transmits radiant light, the type and the like are not particularly limited, and glass, quartz, liquid crystal polymer, etc. can be exemplified, and glass is preferred. Furthermore, it is preferable that the heat resistance of the transparent substrate is higher, and the Tg is preferably 150°C or higher, and more preferably 250°C or higher. The thickness of the transparent substrate is not particularly limited, but it is usually 10 to 1000 μm.

<<感光性樹脂組成物的應用>> 作為將感光性樹脂組成物以層狀應用於透明基板之方法,塗佈為較佳。 具體而言,作為應用方法,可例示浸塗法、氣刀塗佈法、簾式塗佈法、線棒塗佈法、凹版塗佈法、擠壓塗佈法、噴塗法、旋塗法、狹縫塗佈法及噴墨法等。從層狀感光性樹脂組成物(以下,有時稱為“感光性樹脂組成物層”)的厚度的均勻性的觀點考慮,旋塗法、狹縫塗佈法、噴塗法、噴墨法為更佳。依應用方法調整適當的固體成分濃度或塗佈條件,藉此能夠得到所希望的感光性樹脂組成物層。又,能夠依基板的形狀適當選擇塗佈方法,只要為晶圓等圓形基板,則旋塗法或噴塗法、噴墨法等為較佳,且只要為矩形基板,則狹縫塗佈法或噴塗法、噴墨法等為較佳。利用旋塗法時,例如,能夠以500~2000rpm(每分鐘轉數(revolutions per minute)轉速應用10秒鐘~1分鐘左右。 另外,感光性樹脂組成物可以在應用之前進行過濾。過濾使用濾波器進行為較佳。作為濾波器孔径,1μm以下為較佳,0.5μm以下為更佳,0.1μm以下為進一步較佳。<<Application of the photosensitive resin composition>> As a method of applying the photosensitive resin composition to a transparent substrate in a layered form, coating is preferred. Specifically, as the application method, dipping method, air knife coating method, curtain coating method, wire bar coating method, gravure coating method, extrusion coating method, spray coating method, spin coating method, Slit coating method and inkjet method, etc. From the viewpoint of the uniformity of the thickness of the layered photosensitive resin composition (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "photosensitive resin composition layer"), the spin coating method, slit coating method, spray method, and inkjet method are Better. By adjusting the appropriate solid content concentration or coating conditions according to the application method, the desired photosensitive resin composition layer can be obtained. In addition, the coating method can be appropriately selected according to the shape of the substrate. As long as it is a circular substrate such as a wafer, spin coating, spray coating, inkjet, etc. are preferred, and as long as it is a rectangular substrate, the slit coating method Or spray method, inkjet method, etc. are preferable. In the case of spin coating, for example, it can be applied at 500 to 2000 rpm (revolutions per minute) for about 10 seconds to 1 minute. In addition, the photosensitive resin composition can be filtered before application. Filtering is used. As the filter aperture, 1 μm or less is preferable, 0.5 μm or less is more preferable, and 0.1 μm or less is more preferable.

<<感光性樹脂組成物>> 本實施方式中的構成感光性樹脂膜之感光性樹脂組成物包含藉由曝光而形成交聯結構之化合物為較佳,組成物係負型顯影用為更佳,係以有機溶劑顯影之負型感光性樹脂為進一步較佳。 首先,對本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物可含有之成分進行說明。感光性樹脂組成物可以含有該些以外的成分,並且不是必須的。<<Photosensitive resin composition>> The photosensitive resin composition constituting the photosensitive resin film in the present embodiment preferably contains a compound that forms a crosslinked structure by exposure, and the composition is more preferably used for negative development A negative photosensitive resin developed with an organic solvent is more preferred. First, the components which can be contained in the photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment are demonstrated. The photosensitive resin composition may contain components other than these, and is not essential.

<<<樹脂>>> 本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物包含樹脂。 本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物中,樹脂並無特別限制,能夠使用公知的樹脂。樹脂為高耐熱性樹脂為較佳。<<<Resin>>> The photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment contains a resin. In the photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment, resin is not specifically limited, A well-known resin can be used. The resin is preferably a resin with high heat resistance.

本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物包含選自聚醯亞胺前驅物、聚醯亞胺、聚苯并噁唑前驅物及聚苯并噁唑中之至少一種樹脂為較佳。本實施方式的圖案製造方法中,感光性樹脂組成物包含聚醯亞胺前驅物或聚苯并噁唑前驅物為更佳,包含聚醯亞胺前驅物為進一步較佳。The photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment preferably contains at least one resin selected from the group consisting of polyimide precursor, polyimide, polybenzoxazole precursor, and polybenzoxazole. In the pattern manufacturing method of this embodiment, it is more preferable that the photosensitive resin composition contains a polyimide precursor or a polybenzoxazole precursor, and it is more preferable to contain a polyimide precursor.

本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物可以僅包含聚醯亞胺前驅物、聚醯亞胺、聚苯并噁唑前驅物及聚苯并噁唑中的一種,亦可以包含兩種以上。又,包含兩種聚醯亞胺前驅物等,可以包含種類相同,但結構不同的兩種以上的樹脂。 本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物中的樹脂的含量係感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分的10~99質量%為較佳,50~98質量%為更佳,70~96質量%為進一步較佳。The photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment may contain only one of polyimide precursor, polyimide, polybenzoxazole precursor, and polybenzoxazole, or two or more kinds. . In addition, two types of polyimide precursors, etc., may be included, and two or more types of resins of the same type but different structures may be included. The content of the resin in the photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment is preferably 10 to 99% by mass of the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition, more preferably 50 to 98% by mass, and 70 to 96% by mass % Is more preferable.

進而,樹脂包含聚合性基為較佳。 又,感光性樹脂組成物包含聚合性化合物為較佳。藉由這種結構,於曝光部形成三維網絡而成為牢固的交聯膜, 感光性樹脂組成物層(硬化膜)不會因後述的表面活化處理而受到損傷,且藉由表面活化處理,硬化膜與金屬層的黏附性或硬化膜彼此的黏附性更有效地提高。 此外,樹脂包含由-Ar-L-Ar-表示之部分結構為較佳。其中,Ar分別獨立地為芳香族基,L係可以由氟原子取代之碳數1~10的脂肪族烴基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO2 -或-NHCO-及包括上述中的兩個以上的組合之基團。藉由這種結構,感光性樹脂組成物層(硬化膜)成為柔軟的結構,並更有效地發揮抑制層間剝離的產生之效果。Ar係伸苯基為較佳,L係可以由氟原子取代之碳數1或2的脂肪族烴基、-O-、-CO-、-S-或-SO2 -為進一步較佳。其中,脂肪族烴基係伸烷基為較佳。Furthermore, it is preferable that the resin contains a polymerizable group. Moreover, it is preferable that the photosensitive resin composition contains a polymerizable compound. With this structure, a three-dimensional network is formed in the exposed area to become a strong crosslinked film. The photosensitive resin composition layer (cured film) is not damaged by the surface activation treatment described later, and is cured by the surface activation treatment The adhesion between the film and the metal layer or the adhesion between the cured films is more effectively improved. In addition, the resin preferably contains a partial structure represented by -Ar-L-Ar-. Wherein, Ar is each independently an aromatic group, and L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group with 1 to 10 carbons which may be substituted by fluorine atoms, -O-, -CO-, -S-, -SO 2 -or -NHCO- and Including a combination of two or more of the above groups. With this structure, the photosensitive resin composition layer (cured film) becomes a flexible structure, and the effect of suppressing delamination between layers is more effectively exerted. Ar-based phenylene groups are preferred, and L-based aliphatic hydrocarbon groups with 1 or 2 carbon atoms, -O-, -CO-, -S- or -SO 2 -which may be substituted by fluorine atoms are more preferred. Among them, aliphatic hydrocarbon-based alkylene groups are preferred.

(聚醯亞胺前驅物) 聚醯亞胺前驅物中,其種類等並無特別限定,包含由下述式(2)表示之重複單元為較佳。 式(2) [化學式1]

Figure 02_image001
式(2)中,A1 及A2 分別獨立地表示氧原子或NH,R111 表示2價有機基,R115 表示4價有機基,R113 及R114 分別獨立地表示氫原子或1價有機基。(Polyimine precursor) The type of polyimine precursor is not particularly limited, but it is preferable to include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (2). Formula (2) [Chemical Formula 1]
Figure 02_image001
In formula (2), A 1 and A 2 each independently represent an oxygen atom or NH, R 111 represents a divalent organic group, R 115 represents a tetravalent organic group, and R 113 and R 114 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or monovalent Organic base.

式(2)中的A1 及A2 係氧原子或NH為較佳,氧原子為更佳。 式(2)中的R111 表示2價有機基。作為2價有機基,例示包含直鏈或分支脂肪族基、環狀脂肪族基及芳香族基之基團,碳數2~20的直鏈或分支脂肪族基、碳數6~20的環狀脂肪族基、碳數6~20的芳香族基或包括它們的組合之基團為較佳,包括碳數6~20的芳香族基之基團為更佳。作為特佳的實施方式,可例示式(2)中的R111 係由-Ar-L-Ar-表示之基團。但是,Ar分別獨立地為芳香族基,L係可以由氟原子取代之碳數1~10的脂肪族烴基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO2 -或-NHCO-及包括上述中的兩個以上的組合之基團。這些較佳的範圍與上述相同。In the formula (2), A 1 and A 2 are preferably oxygen atoms or NH, and more preferably oxygen atoms. R 111 in the formula (2) represents a divalent organic group. Examples of divalent organic groups include groups containing linear or branched aliphatic groups, cyclic aliphatic groups, and aromatic groups, linear or branched aliphatic groups with 2 to 20 carbons, and rings with 6 to 20 carbons. A fatty group, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbons, or a combination thereof is preferable, and a group including an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbons is more preferable. As a particularly preferred embodiment, R 111 in formula (2) is a group represented by -Ar-L-Ar-. However, Ar is each independently an aromatic group, and L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group with 1 to 10 carbons that can be substituted with fluorine atoms, -O-, -CO-, -S-, -SO 2 -or -NHCO- and Including a combination of two or more of the above groups. These preferable ranges are the same as described above.

式(2)中的R111 由二胺衍生為較佳。作為在聚醯亞胺前驅物的製造中所使用之二胺,可列舉直鏈或分支脂肪族、環狀脂肪族或芳香族二胺等。二胺可以僅使用一種,亦可以使用兩種以上。 具體而言,係含有碳數2~20的直鏈或分支脂肪族基、碳數6~20的環狀脂肪族基、碳數6~20的芳香族基或包括它們的組合之基團之二胺為較佳,含有由碳數2~60的芳香族基構成之基團之二胺為更佳。作為芳香族基的例,可列舉下述芳香族基。Preferably, R 111 in formula (2) is derived from diamine. Examples of diamines used in the production of the polyimide precursor include linear or branched aliphatic, cyclic aliphatic, or aromatic diamines. Only one type of diamine may be used, or two or more types may be used. Specifically, it is one of a group containing a linear or branched aliphatic group having 2 to 20 carbons, a cyclic aliphatic group having 6 to 20 carbons, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbons, or a combination thereof Diamines are preferred, and diamines containing a group composed of an aromatic group having 2 to 60 carbon atoms are more preferred. As an example of an aromatic group, the following aromatic group can be mentioned.

[化學式2]

Figure 02_image003
上述芳香族基中,A係選自單鍵或可以由氟原子取代之碳數1~10的脂肪族烴基、-O-、-C(=O)-、-S-、-S(=O)2 -、-NHCO-及它們的組合之基團為較佳,係選自單鍵、可以由氟原子取代之碳數1~3的伸烷基、-O-、-C(=O)-、-S-、-SO2 -之基團為更佳,選自包括-CH2 -、-O-、-S-、-SO2 -、-C(CF32 -及-C(CH32 -之組中之2價基團為進一步較佳。[Chemical formula 2]
Figure 02_image003
Among the above-mentioned aromatic groups, A is selected from single bonds or aliphatic hydrocarbon groups with 1 to 10 carbons which can be substituted by fluorine atoms, -O-, -C(=O)-, -S-, -S(=O ) 2 -, -NHCO- and their combination groups are preferred, which are selected from single bonds, alkylene groups with 1 to 3 carbons that can be substituted by fluorine atoms, -O-, -C (=O) -, -S-, -SO 2 -are more preferably selected from groups including -CH 2 -, -O-, -S-, -SO 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -and -C( The divalent group in the group of CH 3 ) 2 -is further preferred.

作為二胺,具體而言可列舉選自1,2-二胺基乙烷、1,2-二胺基丙烷、1,3-二胺基丙烷、1,4-二胺基丁烷及1,6-二胺基己烷;1,2-二胺基環戊烷或1,3-二胺基環戊烷、1,2-二胺基環己烷、1,3-二胺基環己烷或1,4-二胺基環己烷、1,2-雙(胺基甲基)環己烷、1,3-雙(胺基甲基)環己烷或1,4-雙(胺基甲基)環己烷、雙-(4-胺基環己基)甲烷、雙-(3-胺基環己基)甲烷、4,4’-二胺基-3,3’-二甲基環己基甲烷及異佛爾酮二胺;間苯二胺及對苯二胺、二胺基甲苯、4,4’-二胺基聯苯及3,3’-二胺基聯苯、4,4’-二胺基二苯醚及3,3’-二胺基二苯醚、4,4’-二胺基二苯基甲烷及3,3’-二胺基二苯基甲烷、4,4’-二胺基二苯基碸及3,3’-二胺基二苯基碸、4,4’-二胺基二苯硫醚及3,3’-二胺基二苯硫醚、4,4’-二胺基二苯甲酮及3,3’-二胺基二苯甲酮、3,3’-二甲基-4,4’-二胺基聯苯、2,2’-二甲基-4,4’-二胺基聯苯、3,3’-二甲氧基-4,4’-二胺基聯苯、2,2-雙(4-胺基苯基)丙烷、2,2-雙(4-胺基苯基)六氟丙烷、2,2-雙(3-羥基-4-胺基苯基)丙烷、2,2-雙(3-羥基-4-胺基苯基)六氟丙烷、2,2-雙(3-胺基-4-羥基苯基)丙烷、2,2-雙(3-胺基-4-羥基苯基)六氟丙烷、雙(3-胺基-4-羥基苯基)碸、雙(4-胺基-3-羥基苯基)碸、4,4’-二胺基對聯三苯、4,4’-雙(4-胺基苯氧基)聯苯、雙[4-(4-胺基苯氧基)苯基]碸、雙[4-(3-胺基苯氧基)苯基]碸、雙[4-(2-胺基苯氧基)苯基]碸、1,4-雙(4-胺基苯氧基)苯、9,10-雙(4-胺基苯基)蒽、3,3’-二甲基-4,4’-二胺基二苯基碸、1,3-雙(4-胺基苯氧基)苯、1,3-雙(3-胺基苯氧基)苯、1,3-雙(4-胺基苯基)苯、3,3’-二乙基-4,4’-二胺基二苯基甲烷、3,3’-二甲基-4,4’-二胺基二苯基甲烷、4,4’-二胺基八氟聯苯、2,2-雙[4-(4-胺基苯氧基)苯基]丙烷、2,2-雙[4-(4-胺基苯氧基)苯基]六氟丙烷、9,9-雙(4-胺基苯基)-10-氫蒽、3,3’,4,4’-四胺基聯苯、3,3’,4,4’-四胺基二苯醚、1,4-二胺基蒽醌、1,5-二胺基蒽醌、3,3-二羥基-4,4’-二胺基聯苯、9,9’-雙(4-胺基苯基)茀、4,4’-二甲基-3,3’-二胺基二苯基碸、3,3’,5,5’-四甲基-4,4’-二胺基二苯基甲烷、2,4-二胺基枯烯及2,5-二胺基枯烯、2,5-二甲基-對苯二胺、乙醯胍胺、2,3,5,6-四甲基-對苯二胺、2,4,6-三甲基-間苯二胺、雙(3-胺基丙基)四甲基二矽氧烷、2,7-二胺基茀、2,5-二胺基吡啶、1,2-雙(4-胺基苯基)乙烷、二胺基苯甲醯苯胺、二胺基苯甲酸的酯、1,5-二胺基萘、二胺基三氟甲苯、二胺基蒽醌、1,3-雙(4-胺基苯基)六氟丙烷、1,4-雙(4-胺基苯基)八氟丁烷、1,5-雙(4-胺基苯基)十氟戊烷、1,7-雙(4-胺基苯基)十四氟庚烷、2,2-雙[4-(3-胺基苯氧基)苯基]六氟丙烷、2,2-雙[4-(2-胺基苯氧基)苯基]六氟丙烷、2,2-雙[4-(4-胺基苯氧基)-3,5-二甲基苯基]六氟丙烷、2,2-雙[4-(4-胺基苯氧基)-3,5-雙(三氟甲基)苯基]六氟丙烷、對雙(4-胺基-2-三氟甲基苯氧基)苯、4,4’-雙(4-胺基-2-三氟甲基苯氧基)聯苯、4,4’-雙(4-胺基-3-三氟甲基苯氧基)聯苯、4,4’-雙(4-胺基-2-三氟甲基苯氧基)二苯基碸、4,4’-雙(3-胺基-5-三氟甲基苯氧基)二苯基碸、2,2-雙[4-(4-胺基-3-三氟甲基苯氧基)苯基]六氟丙烷、3,3’,5,5’-四甲基-4,4’-二胺基聯苯、4,4’-二胺基-2,2’-雙(三氟甲基)聯苯、2,2’,5,5’,6,6’-六氟聯甲苯胺及4,4’’’-二胺基四聯苯中之至少一種二胺。As the diamine, specifically selected from 1,2-diaminoethane, 1,2-diaminopropane, 1,3-diaminopropane, 1,4-diaminobutane, and 1 ,6-Diaminohexane; 1,2-diaminocyclopentane or 1,3-diaminocyclopentane, 1,2-diaminocyclohexane, 1,3-diaminocyclopentane Hexane or 1,4-diaminocyclohexane, 1,2-bis(aminomethyl)cyclohexane, 1,3-bis(aminomethyl)cyclohexane or 1,4-bis( Aminomethyl) cyclohexane, bis-(4-aminocyclohexyl)methane, bis-(3-aminocyclohexyl)methane, 4,4'-diamino-3,3'-dimethyl Cyclohexylmethane and isophorone diamine; m-phenylenediamine and p-phenylenediamine, diaminotoluene, 4,4'-diaminobiphenyl and 3,3'-diaminobiphenyl, 4, 4'-diaminodiphenyl ether and 3,3'-diaminodiphenyl ether, 4,4'-diaminodiphenylmethane and 3,3'-diaminodiphenylmethane, 4, 4'-diaminodiphenyl sulfide and 3,3'-diaminodiphenyl sulfide, 4,4'-diaminodiphenyl sulfide and 3,3'-diaminodiphenyl sulfide, 4,4'-diaminobenzophenone and 3,3'-diaminobenzophenone, 3,3'-dimethyl-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 2,2' -Dimethyl-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 3,3'-dimethoxy-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 2,2-bis(4-aminophenyl) Propane, 2,2-bis(4-aminophenyl)hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4- Aminophenyl) hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)hexafluoropropane, double (3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl) ash, bis(4-amino-3-hydroxyphenyl) ash, 4,4'-diamino-p-terphenyl, 4,4'-bis(4- Aminophenoxy)biphenyl, bis[4-(4-aminophenoxy)phenyl]sulfuric acid, bis[4-(3-aminophenoxy)phenyl]sulfuric acid, bis[4-( 2-aminophenoxy) phenyl] chrysene, 1,4-bis(4-aminophenoxy)benzene, 9,10-bis(4-aminophenyl)anthracene, 3,3'-bis Methyl-4,4'-diaminodiphenyl benzene, 1,3-bis(4-aminophenoxy)benzene, 1,3-bis(3-aminophenoxy)benzene, 1, 3-bis(4-aminophenyl)benzene, 3,3'-diethyl-4,4'-diaminodiphenylmethane, 3,3'-dimethyl-4,4'-di Aminodiphenylmethane, 4,4'-diaminooctafluorobiphenyl, 2,2-bis[4-(4-aminophenoxy)phenyl]propane, 2,2-bis[4- (4-Aminophenoxy)phenyl]hexafluoropropane, 9,9-bis(4-aminophenyl)-10-hydroanthracene, 3,3',4,4'-tetraaminobiphenyl , 3,3',4,4'-tetraamino diphenyl ether, 1,4-diaminoanthraquinone, 1,5-diaminoanthraquinone, 3,3-dihydroxy-4,4'- Diaminobiphenyl, 9,9'-bis(4-amine Phenyl) pyrene, 4,4'-dimethyl-3,3'-diaminodiphenyl sulfonium, 3,3',5,5'-tetramethyl-4,4'-diamino Diphenylmethane, 2,4-diaminocumene and 2,5-diaminocumene, 2,5-dimethyl-p-phenylenediamine, acetguanamine, 2,3,5,6 -Tetramethyl-p-phenylenediamine, 2,4,6-trimethyl-m-phenylenediamine, bis(3-aminopropyl)tetramethyldisiloxane, 2,7-diaminopyridine , 2,5-diaminopyridine, 1,2-bis(4-aminophenyl)ethane, diaminobenzaniline, ester of diaminobenzoic acid, 1,5-diaminonaphthalene , Diaminobenzotrifluoride, diaminoanthraquinone, 1,3-bis(4-aminophenyl)hexafluoropropane, 1,4-bis(4-aminophenyl)octafluorobutane, 1 ,5-bis(4-aminophenyl)decafluoropentane, 1,7-bis(4-aminophenyl)tetradecafluoroheptane, 2,2-bis[4-(3-aminobenzene) Oxy)phenyl]hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis[4-(2-aminophenoxy)phenyl]hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis[4-(4-aminophenoxy) )-3,5-Dimethylphenyl]hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis[4-(4-aminophenoxy)-3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]hexafluoro Propane, p-bis(4-amino-2-trifluoromethylphenoxy)benzene, 4,4'-bis(4-amino-2-trifluoromethylphenoxy)biphenyl, 4,4 '-Bis(4-amino-3-trifluoromethylphenoxy)biphenyl, 4,4'-bis(4-amino-2-trifluoromethylphenoxy)diphenyl sulfide, 4 ,4'-bis(3-amino-5-trifluoromethylphenoxy) diphenyl sulfide, 2,2-bis[4-(4-amino-3-trifluoromethylphenoxy) Phenyl]hexafluoropropane, 3,3',5,5'-tetramethyl-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 4,4'-diamino-2,2'-bis(trifluoro (Methyl) biphenyl, at least one diamine of 2,2',5,5',6,6'-hexafluorotolidine and 4,4"'-diaminotetraphenyl.

又,以下所示之二胺(DA-1)~(DA-18)亦為較佳。In addition, the diamines (DA-1) to (DA-18) shown below are also preferable.

[化學式3]

Figure 02_image005
[Chemical formula 3]
Figure 02_image005

[化學式4]

Figure 02_image007
[Chemical formula 4]
Figure 02_image007

又,作為較佳的例,亦可列舉於主鏈具有至少兩個以上的伸烷基二醇單元之二胺。較佳為於一分子中組合乙二醇鏈、丙二醇鏈中的任一個或兩者而包含之二胺,更佳為不包含芳香環之二胺。作為具體例,可列舉JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)KH-511、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)ED-600、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)ED-900、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)ED-2003、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)EDR-148、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)EDR-176、D-200、D-400、D-2000、D-4000(以上為產品名,HUNTSMAN製)、1-(2-(2-(2-胺基丙氧基)乙氧基)丙氧基)丙烷-2-胺、1-(1-(1-(2-胺基丙氧基)丙烷-2-基)氧基)丙烷-2-胺等,但並不限定於這些。 以下示出JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)KH-511、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)ED-600、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)ED-900、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)ED-2003、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)EDR-148、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)EDR-176的結構。Moreover, as a preferable example, the diamine which has at least two or more alkylene glycol units in the main chain can also be mentioned. Preferably, it is a diamine that combines either or both of an ethylene glycol chain and a propylene glycol chain in one molecule, and more preferably does not contain an aromatic ring. As specific examples, JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) KH-511, JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) ED-600, JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) ED-900, JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) ED-2003, JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) EDR-148 , JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) EDR-176, D-200, D-400, D-2000, D-4000 (the above are product names, manufactured by HUNTSMAN), 1-(2-(2-(2-aminopropoxy) Ethoxy)propoxy)propane-2-amine, 1-(1-(1-(2-aminopropoxy)propan-2-yl)oxy)propane-2-amine, etc., but It is not limited to these. The following shows JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) KH-511, JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) ED-600, JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) ED-900, JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) ED-2003, JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) EDR-148, JEFFAMINE ( Registered trademark) The structure of EDR-176.

[化學式5]

Figure 02_image009
[Chemical formula 5]
Figure 02_image009

上述中,x、y、z為平均值。In the above, x, y, and z are average values.

從所得到之硬化膜的柔軟性的觀點考慮,式(2)中的R111 由-Ar-L-Ar-表示為較佳。其中,Ar分別獨立地為芳香族基,L包括可以由氟原子取代之碳數1~10的脂肪族烴基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO2 -或-NHCO-及上述中的兩個以上的組合之基團。Ar係伸苯基為較佳,L係可以由氟原子取代之碳數1或2的脂肪族烴基、-O-、-CO-、-S-或-SO2 -為進一步較佳。其中,脂肪族烴基係伸烷基為較佳。From the viewpoint of the flexibility of the obtained cured film, R 111 in the formula (2) is preferably represented by -Ar-L-Ar-. Wherein, Ar is each independently an aromatic group, and L includes an aliphatic hydrocarbon group with 1 to 10 carbons which may be substituted by a fluorine atom, -O-, -CO-, -S-, -SO 2 -or -NHCO- and A group of a combination of two or more of the above. Ar-based phenylene groups are preferred, and L-based aliphatic hydrocarbon groups with 1 or 2 carbon atoms, -O-, -CO-, -S- or -SO 2 -which may be substituted by fluorine atoms are more preferred. Among them, aliphatic hydrocarbon-based alkylene groups are preferred.

從i射線透過率的觀點考慮,式(2)中的R111 係由下述式(51)或式(61)表示之2價有機基為較佳。尤其,從i射線透過率、易獲得的觀點考慮,由式(61)表示之2價有機基為更佳。 式(51) [化學式6]

Figure 02_image011
式(51)中,R10 ~R17 分別獨立地為氫原子、氟原子或1價有機基,R10 ~R17 中的至少一個係氟原子、甲基或三氟甲基。 作為R10 ~R17 的1價有機基,可列舉碳數1~10(較佳為碳數1~6)的未經取代的烷基、碳數1~10(較佳為碳數1~6)的氟化烷基等。 式(61) [化學式7]
Figure 02_image013
式(61)中,R18 及R19 分別獨立地為氟原子或三氟甲基。 作為賦予式(51)或(61)的結構之二胺化合物,可列舉2,2’-二甲基聯苯胺、2,2’-双(三氟甲基)-4,4’-二胺基聯苯、2,2’-雙(氟)-4,4’-二胺基聯苯、4,4’-二胺基八氟聯苯等。該些可以使用一種或組合使用兩種以上。From the viewpoint of i-ray transmittance, R 111 in the formula (2) is preferably a divalent organic group represented by the following formula (51) or formula (61). In particular, from the viewpoint of i-ray transmittance and easy availability, the divalent organic group represented by the formula (61) is more preferable. Formula (51) [Chemical Formula 6]
Figure 02_image011
In formula (51), R 10 to R 17 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or a monovalent organic group, and at least one of R 10 to R 17 is a fluorine atom, a methyl group, or a trifluoromethyl group. Examples of the monovalent organic groups of R 10 to R 17 include unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbons (preferably 1 to 6 carbons), and 1 to 10 carbons (preferably 1 to 6 carbons). 6) Fluorinated alkyl groups, etc. Formula (61) [Chemical Formula 7]
Figure 02_image013
In formula (61), R 18 and R 19 are each independently a fluorine atom or a trifluoromethyl group. Examples of the diamine compound imparting the structure of formula (51) or (61) include 2,2'-dimethylbenzidine and 2,2'-bis(trifluoromethyl)-4,4'-diamine Biphenyl, 2,2'-bis(fluoro)-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 4,4'-diaminooctafluorobiphenyl, etc. These can be used 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types.

式(2)中的R115 表示4價有機基。作為4價有機基,包含芳香環之4價有機基為較佳,由下述式(5)或式(6)表示之基團為更佳。 式(5) [化學式8]

Figure 02_image015
式(5)中,R112 係選自單鍵或可以由氟原子取代之碳數1~10的脂肪族烴基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO2 -、-NHCO-以及包括它們的組合之基團為較佳,係選自單鍵、可以由氟原子取代之碳數1~3的伸烷基、-O-、-CO-、-S-及-SO2 -之基團為更佳,選自包括-CH2 -、-C(CF32 -、-C(CH32 -、-O-、-CO-、-S-及-SO2 -之組中之2價基團為進一步較佳。R 115 in formula (2) represents a tetravalent organic group. As the tetravalent organic group, a tetravalent organic group containing an aromatic ring is preferable, and a group represented by the following formula (5) or formula (6) is more preferable. Formula (5) [Chemical Formula 8]
Figure 02_image015
In formula (5), R 112 is selected from a single bond or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group with 1 to 10 carbons which may be substituted by a fluorine atom, -O-, -CO-, -S-, -SO 2 -, -NHCO- And groups including their combinations are preferred, and are selected from single bonds, alkylene groups with 1 to 3 carbons which may be substituted by fluorine atoms, -O-, -CO-, -S- and -SO 2- The group is more preferably selected from among -CH 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, -C(CH 3 ) 2 -, -O-, -CO-, -S- and -SO 2- The divalent group in the group is more preferable.

式(6) [化學式9]

Figure 02_image017
Formula (6) [Chemical Formula 9]
Figure 02_image017

關於式(2)中的R115 ,具體而言可列舉從四羧酸二酐去除酐基之後殘存之四羧酸殘基等。四羧酸二酐可以僅使用一種,亦可以使用兩種以上。 四羧酸二酐由下述式(O)表示為較佳。 式(O) [化學式10]

Figure 02_image019
式(O)中,R115 表示4價有機基。R115 的較佳範圍與式(2)中的R115 的定義相同,較佳範圍亦相同。Regarding R 115 in the formula (2), specifically, a tetracarboxylic acid residue remaining after removing an anhydride group from tetracarboxylic dianhydride, etc. can be mentioned. Only one type of tetracarboxylic dianhydride may be used, or two or more types may be used. Tetracarboxylic dianhydride is preferably represented by the following formula (O). Formula (O) [Chemical Formula 10]
Figure 02_image019
In formula (O), R 115 represents a tetravalent organic group. The preferred range of formula R 115 and R 115 is the same as defined in (2), and preferred ranges are also the same.

作為四羧酸二酐的具體例,可例示選自均苯四甲酸二酐(Pyromellitic dianhydride,PMDA)、3,3’,4,4’-聯苯四羧酸二酐、3,3’,4,4’-二苯硫醚四羧酸二酐、3,3’,4,4’-二苯基碸四羧酸二酐、3,3’,4,4’-二苯甲酮四羧酸二酐、3,3’,4,4’-二苯基甲烷四羧酸二酐、2,2’,3,3’-二苯基甲烷四羧酸二酐、2,3,3’,4’-聯苯四羧酸二酐、2,3,3’,4’-二苯甲酮四羧酸二酐、4,4’氧基二鄰苯二甲酸的二酐、2,3,6,7-萘四羧酸二酐、1,4,5,7-萘四羧酸二酐、2,2-雙(3,4-二羧基苯基)丙烷二酐、2,2-雙(2,3-二羧基苯基)丙烷二酐、2,2-雙(3,4-二羧基苯基)六氟丙烷二酐、1,3-二苯基六氟丙烷-3,3,4,4-四羧酸二酐、1,4,5,6-萘四羧酸二酐、2,2’,3,3’-二苯基四羧酸二酐、3,4,9,10-苝四羧酸二酐、1,2,4,5-萘四羧酸二酐、1,4,5,8-萘四羧酸二酐、1,8,9,10-菲四羧酸二酐、1,1-雙(2,3-二羧基苯基)乙烷二酐、1,1-雙(3,4-二羧基苯基)乙烷二酐、1,2,3,4-苯四羧酸二酐及它們的碳數1~6的烷基衍生物及碳數1~6的烷氧基衍生物中之至少一種。As a specific example of tetracarboxylic dianhydride, can be exemplified selected from pyromellitic dianhydride (PMDA), 3,3',4,4'-biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3', 4,4'-Diphenyl sulfide tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3',4,4'-diphenyl sulfide tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3',4,4'-benzophenone tetra Carboxylic dianhydride, 3,3',4,4'-diphenylmethanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2',3,3'-diphenylmethanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,3,3 ',4'-Biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,3,3',4'-benzophenonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 4,4'oxydiphthalic dianhydride, 2, 3,6,7-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,4,5,7-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2-bis(3,4-dicarboxyphenyl)propane dianhydride, 2,2 -Bis(2,3-dicarboxyphenyl)propane dianhydride, 2,2-bis(3,4-dicarboxyphenyl)hexafluoropropane dianhydride, 1,3-diphenylhexafluoropropane-3, 3,4,4-tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,4,5,6-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2',3,3'-diphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,4, 9,10-perylenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,2,4,5-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,4,5,8-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,8,9,10-phenanthrene Tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,1-bis(2,3-dicarboxyphenyl)ethane dianhydride, 1,1-bis(3,4-dicarboxyphenyl)ethane dianhydride, 1,2, At least one of 3,4-benzenetetracarboxylic dianhydride and their C1-C6 alkyl derivatives and C1-C6 alkoxy derivatives.

又,作為較佳例還可列舉下述中所示出之四羧酸二酐(DAA-1)~(DAA-5)。 [化學式11]

Figure 02_image021
In addition, tetracarboxylic dianhydrides (DAA-1) to (DAA-5) shown below can also be cited as preferred examples. [Chemical formula 11]
Figure 02_image021

式(2)中的R111 和R115 中的至少一方具有羥基亦為較佳。更具體而言,作為R111 ,可列舉二胺基酚衍生物的殘基。It is also preferable that at least one of R 111 and R 115 in the formula (2) has a hydroxyl group. More specifically, as R 111 , a residue of a diaminophenol derivative can be mentioned.

式(2)中的R113 及R114 分別獨立地表示氫原子或1價有機基。 式(2)中的R113 及R114 中的至少一方包含聚合性基為較佳,兩者均包含聚合性基為更佳。聚合性基為藉由熱、自由基等的作用能夠進行交聯反應之基團。作為聚合性基,光自由基聚合性基為較佳。作為聚合性基的具體例,可列舉具有烯屬不飽和鍵之基團、烷氧甲基、羥甲基、醯氧甲基、環氧基、氧雜環丁基、苯并噁唑基、嵌段異氰酸酯基、羥甲基、胺基。作為具有聚醯亞胺前驅物之自由基聚合性基,具有烯屬不飽和鍵之基團為較佳。 作為具有烯屬不飽和鍵之基團,可列舉乙烯基、(甲基)烯丙基、由下述式(III)表示之基團等。R 113 and R 114 in formula (2) each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. At least one of R 113 and R 114 in the formula (2) preferably contains a polymerizable group, and it is more preferred that both of them contain a polymerizable group. The polymerizable group is a group that can undergo a crosslinking reaction by the action of heat, free radicals, and the like. As the polymerizable group, a photoradical polymerizable group is preferred. Specific examples of polymerizable groups include groups having ethylenically unsaturated bonds, alkoxymethyl, hydroxymethyl, oxomethyl, epoxy, oxetanyl, benzoxazolyl, Blocked isocyanate group, methylol group, amine group. As the radical polymerizable group having a polyimide precursor, a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferred. Examples of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth)allyl group, a group represented by the following formula (III), and the like.

[化學式12]

Figure 02_image023
[Chemical formula 12]
Figure 02_image023

式(III)中,R200 表示氫原子或甲基,甲基為更佳。 式(III)中,R201 表示碳數2~12的伸烷基、-CH2 CH(OH)CH2 -或碳數4~30的聚氧伸烷基。 較佳的R201 的例中,可列舉伸乙基、伸丙基、三亞甲基、四亞甲基、1,2-丁二基、1,3-丁二基、五亞甲基、六亞甲基、八亞甲基、十二亞甲基、-CH2 CH(OH)CH2 -,伸乙基、伸丙基、三亞甲基、-CH2 CH(OH)CH2 -為更佳。 特佳為R200 係甲基,R201 係伸乙基。In the formula (III), R 200 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and a methyl group is more preferred. In the formula (III), R 201 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, -CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 -or a polyoxyalkylene group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms. Preferred examples of R 201 include ethylene, propylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene, 1,2-butanediyl, 1,3-butanediyl, pentamethylene, hexamethylene Methylene, octamethylene, dodecamethylene, -CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 -, ethylene, propylene, trimethylene, -CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2- good. Particularly preferably, R 200 is a methyl group, and R 201 is an ethylene group.

式(2)中的R113 或R114 可以係除了聚合性基以外的1價有機基。 從針對有機溶劑的溶解度的觀點考慮,式(2)中的R113 或R114 係1價有機基為較佳。作為1價有機基,包含直鏈或分支烷基、環狀烷基或芳香族基為較佳。作為1價有機基,具有鍵結在構成芳基之碳原子之1、2或3個(較佳為1個)酸性基團之芳香族基及具有構成芳基之碳原子之1、2或3個(較佳為1個)酸性基團之芳烷基為特佳。具體而言,可列舉具有酸性基團之碳數6~20的芳香族基、具有酸性基團之碳數7~25的芳烷基。更具體而言,可列舉具有酸性基團之苯基及具有酸性基團之苄基。酸性基團係羥基為較佳。 R113 或R114 係氫原子、2-羥基苄基、3-羥基苄基及4-羥基苄基為進一步特佳。R 113 or R 114 in formula (2) may be a monovalent organic group other than a polymerizable group. From the viewpoint of solubility to an organic solvent, R 113 or R 114 in formula (2) is preferably a monovalent organic group. As the monovalent organic group, it is preferable to include a linear or branched alkyl group, a cyclic alkyl group, or an aromatic group. As a monovalent organic group, an aromatic group having 1, 2, or 3 (preferably 1) acidic groups bonded to the carbon atoms constituting the aryl group, and 1, 2, or having carbon atoms constituting the aryl group Three (preferably one) aralkyl groups of acidic groups are particularly preferred. Specifically, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms having an acidic group, and an aralkyl group having 7 to 25 carbon atoms having an acidic group can be mentioned. More specifically, a phenyl group having an acidic group and a benzyl group having an acidic group can be cited. The acidic group is preferably a hydroxyl group. R 113 or R 114 is a hydrogen atom, 2-hydroxybenzyl, 3-hydroxybenzyl, and 4-hydroxybenzyl are more particularly preferred.

式(2)中的R113 或R114 所表示之烷基的碳數係1~30為較佳。作為直鏈或分支烷基,例如,可列舉甲基、乙基、丙基、丁基、戊基、己基、庚基、辛基、壬基、癸基、十二烷基、十四烷基,十八烷基、異丙基、異丁基、第二丁基、第三丁基、1-乙基戊基及2-乙基己基。 式(2)中的R113 或R114 所表示之環狀的烷基可以係單環環狀的烷基,亦可以係多環環狀的烷基。作為單環環狀的烷基,例如,可列舉環丙基、環丁基、環戊基、環己基、環庚基及環辛基。作為多環環狀的烷基,例如,可列舉金剛烷基、降冰片基、冰片基、莰烯基(camphenyl)、十氫萘基、三環癸烷基、四環癸烷基、莰二醯基、二環己基及蒎烯基(pinenyl)。其中,從兼顧高感度化的觀點考慮,環己基為最佳。又,作為被芳香族基取代之烷基,被後述之芳香族基取代之直鏈烷基為較佳。 作為由式(2)中的R113 或R114 表示之芳香族基,具體而言,經取代或未經取代的苯環、萘環、戊搭烯環、茚環、薁環、庚搭烯環、二環戊二烯並苯環、苝環、稠五苯環、苊烯環、菲環、蒽環、稠四苯環、䓛環、三伸苯環、茀環、聯苯環、吡咯環、呋喃環、噻吩環、咪唑環、噁唑環、噻唑環、吡啶環、吡嗪環、嘧啶環、噠嗪環、吲哚嗪環、吲哚環、苯并呋喃環、苯并噻吩環、異苯并呋喃環、喹嗪環、喹啉環、酞嗪環、萘啶環、喹噁啉環、喹噁唑啉環、異喹啉環、咔唑環、啡啶環、吖啶環、啡啉環、噻蒽環、色烯環、二苯并哌喃環、啡噁噻環、啡噻嗪環或啡嗪環。苯環為最佳。Preferably, the alkyl group represented by R 113 or R 114 in the formula (2) has 1 to 30 carbon atoms. Examples of straight-chain or branched alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, dodecyl, and tetradecyl. , Octadecyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, second butyl, tertiary butyl, 1-ethylpentyl and 2-ethylhexyl. The cyclic alkyl group represented by R 113 or R 114 in the formula (2) may be a monocyclic cyclic alkyl group or a polycyclic cyclic alkyl group. Examples of the monocyclic cyclic alkyl group include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, and cyclooctyl. Examples of polycyclic cyclic alkyl groups include adamantyl, norbornyl, bornyl, camphenyl, decahydronaphthyl, tricyclodecyl, tetracyclodecyl, and camphenyl. Dicyclohexyl and pinenyl (pinenyl). Among them, the cyclohexyl group is the most preferable from the viewpoint of achieving high sensitivity. In addition, as the alkyl group substituted with an aromatic group, a linear alkyl group substituted with an aromatic group described later is preferred. As the aromatic group represented by R 113 or R 114 in the formula (2), specifically, substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring, naphthalene ring, pentene ring, indene ring, azulene ring, heptene ring Ring, dicyclopentacene ring, perylene ring, fused pentacene ring, acenaphthylene ring, phenanthrene ring, anthracene ring, fused tetraphenyl ring, tri-ring, terphenylene ring, pyrene ring, biphenyl ring, pyrrole Ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyridine ring, pyrazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyridazine ring, indoleazine ring, indole ring, benzofuran ring, benzothiophene ring , Isobenzofuran ring, quinazine ring, quinoline ring, phthalazine ring, naphthyridine ring, quinoxaline ring, quinoxazoline ring, isoquinoline ring, carbazole ring, phenanthridine ring, acridine ring , Phenanthroline ring, thianthracene ring, chromene ring, dibenzopyran ring, phenoxathi ring, phenanthrazine ring or phenanthrazine ring. The benzene ring is the best.

當式(2)中的R113 係氫原子時,或者當式(2)中的R114 係氫原子時,聚醯亞胺前驅物可以與具有烯屬不飽和鍵之3級胺化合物形成共軛鹼。作為具有該種烯屬不飽和鍵之3級胺化合物的例,可列舉N,N-二甲基胺基甲基丙烯酸丙酯。When R 113 in formula (2) is a hydrogen atom, or when R 114 in formula (2) is a hydrogen atom, the polyimide precursor can form a co-polymer with a tertiary amine compound having ethylenically unsaturated bonds. Conjugate base. Examples of tertiary amine compounds having such ethylenically unsaturated bonds include N,N-dimethylamino propyl methacrylate.

又,聚醯亞胺前驅物中,於結構單元中具有氟原子亦為較佳。聚醯亞胺前驅物中的氟原子含量係10質量%以上為較佳,又,20質量%以下為較佳。In addition, it is also preferable to have a fluorine atom in the structural unit of the polyimide precursor. The content of fluorine atoms in the polyimide precursor is preferably 10% by mass or more, and more preferably 20% by mass or less.

又,以提高與基板的黏附性為目的,可以對聚醯亞胺前驅物共聚具有矽氧烷結構之脂肪族基。具體而言,作為用於導入矽氧烷結構之脂肪族基之二胺成分,可列舉雙(3-胺基丙基)四甲基二矽氧烷、雙(對胺基苯基)八甲基五矽氧烷等。In addition, for the purpose of improving the adhesion to the substrate, an aliphatic group having a siloxane structure can be copolymerized with the polyimide precursor. Specifically, as the diamine component used to introduce the aliphatic group of the silicone structure, bis(3-aminopropyl)tetramethyldisiloxane, bis(p-aminophenyl)octamethyl Pentasiloxane etc.

由式(2)表示之重複單元係由下述式(2-A)表示之重複單元為較佳。亦即,聚醯亞胺前驅物的至少一種係具有由式(2-A)表示之重複單元之前驅物為較佳。藉由該種結構,能夠進一步增加曝光寬容度的寬度。 式(2-A) [化學式13]

Figure 02_image025
式(2-A)中,A1 及A2 表示氧原子,R111 及R112 分別獨立地表示2價有機基,R113 及R114 分別獨立地表示氫原子或1價有機基,R113 及R114 中的至少一個係包含聚合性基之基團,係聚合性基為較佳。The repeating unit represented by the formula (2) is preferably a repeating unit represented by the following formula (2-A). That is, at least one of the polyimide precursors is preferably a precursor having a repeating unit represented by formula (2-A). With this structure, the width of exposure latitude can be further increased. Formula (2-A) [Chemical Formula 13]
Figure 02_image025
In formula (2-A), A 1 and A 2 represent an oxygen atom, R 111 and R 112 each independently represent a divalent organic group, R 113 and R 114 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and R 113 At least one of R 114 and R 114 is a group containing a polymerizable group, preferably a polymerizable group.

式(2-A)中的A1 、A2 、R111 、R113 及R114 分別獨立地與式(2)中的A1 、A2 、R111 、R113 及R114 定義相同,較佳範圍亦相同。 式(2-A)中的R112 與式(5)中的R112 定義相同,較佳範圍亦相同。Of formula (2-A) in A 1, A 2, R 111 , R 113 and R 114 each independently have the formula A 1, A 2, R 111 , the same as R 113 and R 114 defined in (2), more The optimal range is also the same. 112 same as defined in formula R 112 and R (5) in the formula (2-A), the preferred range is also the same.

聚醯亞胺前驅物中,由式(2)表示之重複單元可以係一種,亦可以係兩種以上。又,聚醯亞胺前驅物可以包含由式(2)表示之重複單元的結構異構體。又,除了由上述式(2)表示之重複單元以外,聚醯亞胺前驅物還可以包含另一種重複單元。In the polyimide precursor, the repeating unit represented by formula (2) may be one type or two or more types. In addition, the polyimide precursor may include structural isomers of the repeating unit represented by formula (2). Moreover, in addition to the repeating unit represented by the above formula (2), the polyimide precursor may further include another repeating unit.

作為本發明中的聚醯亞胺前驅物的一實施方式,可例示總重複單元的50莫耳%以上,進而為70莫耳%以上,尤其90莫耳%以上係由式(2)表示之重複單元之聚醯亞胺前驅物。As an embodiment of the polyimide precursor in the present invention, 50 mol% or more of the total repeating unit can be exemplified, further 70 mol% or more, especially 90 mol% or more, represented by formula (2) Polyimide precursor of repeating unit.

聚醯亞胺前驅物藉由使二羧酸或二羧酸衍生物與二胺反應而得到為較佳。聚醯亞胺前驅物藉由利用鹵化劑將二羧酸或二羧酸衍生物鹵化之後,使其與二胺反應而得到為更佳。聚醯亞胺前驅物可利用如下方法來得到,例如,於低溫中使四羧酸二酐與二胺化合物(由作為單胺之封端劑取代一部分)反應之方法、於低溫中使四羧酸二酐(由作為酸酐或單酸氯化物或單活性酯化合物之封端劑取代一部分)與二胺化合物反應之方法、由四羧酸二酐和醇得到二酯之後,於縮合劑的存在下使其與二胺(由作為單胺之封端劑取代一部分)反應之方法、由四羧酸二酐和醇得到二酯之後,將殘留之羧酸酸氯化而使其與二胺(由作為單胺之封端劑取代一部分)反應之方法等方法。 聚醯亞胺前驅物的製造方法中,進行反應時,使用有機溶劑為較佳。有機溶劑可以係一種,亦可以係兩種以上。 作為有機溶劑,能夠依原料適當設定,可例示吡啶、二乙二醇二甲醚(二甘二甲醚)、N-甲基吡咯烷酮及N-乙基吡咯烷酮。The polyimide precursor is preferably obtained by reacting a dicarboxylic acid or a dicarboxylic acid derivative with a diamine. The polyimide precursor is preferably obtained by halogenating a dicarboxylic acid or a dicarboxylic acid derivative with a halogenating agent and then reacting it with a diamine. The polyimide precursor can be obtained by the following methods, for example, a method of reacting a tetracarboxylic dianhydride with a diamine compound (partially replaced by a blocking agent as a monoamine) at a low temperature, and a tetracarboxylic acid at a low temperature. The method of reacting acid dianhydride (partially replaced by blocking agent as acid anhydride or monoacid chloride or monoactive ester compound) with diamine compound, after obtaining diester from tetracarboxylic dianhydride and alcohol, in the presence of condensation agent Under the method of reacting it with diamine (partially substituted by the blocking agent as monoamine), after obtaining the diester from tetracarboxylic dianhydride and alcohol, the remaining carboxylic acid is chlorinated to make it react with diamine ( Substituting part of the blocking agent as a monoamine) reaction method and other methods. In the production method of the polyimide precursor, it is preferable to use an organic solvent when the reaction is carried out. The organic solvent may be one type or two or more types. The organic solvent can be appropriately set according to the raw material, and pyridine, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (diglyme), N-methylpyrrolidone, and N-ethylpyrrolidone can be exemplified.

製造聚醯亞胺前驅物時,為了進一步提高保存穩定性,用酸酐、單羧酸、單酸氯化物、單活性酯化合物等封端劑密封前驅物的主鏈末端為較佳。該些中,使用單胺為更佳,作為單胺的較佳的化合物,可列舉苯胺、2-乙炔基苯胺、3-乙炔基苯胺、4-乙炔基苯胺、5-胺基-8-羥基喹啉、1-羥基-7-胺基萘、1-羥基-6-胺基萘、1-羥基-5-胺基萘、1-羥基-4-胺基萘、2-羥基-7-胺基萘、2-羥基-6-胺基萘、2-羥基-5-胺基萘、1-羧基-7-胺基萘、1-羧基-6-胺基萘、1-羧基-5-胺基萘、2-羧基-7-胺基萘、2-羧基-6-胺基萘、2-羧基-5-胺基萘、2-胺基苯甲酸、3-胺基苯甲酸、4-胺基苯甲酸、4-胺基水楊酸、5-胺基水楊酸、6-胺基水楊酸、2-胺基苯磺酸、3-胺基苯磺酸、4-胺基苯磺酸、3-胺基-4,6-二羥基嘧啶、2-胺基苯酚、3-胺基苯酚、4-胺基苯酚、2-胺基硫苯酚、3-胺基硫苯酚、4-胺基硫苯酚等。可以將該些使用兩種以上,亦可以藉由使複數個封端劑反應而導入複數個不同的末端基。When producing the polyimide precursor, in order to further improve the storage stability, it is preferable to seal the main chain end of the precursor with a blocking agent such as acid anhydride, monocarboxylic acid, monoacid chloride, and monoactive ester compound. Among these, it is more preferable to use monoamines. Preferred compounds for monoamines include aniline, 2-ethynylaniline, 3-ethynylaniline, 4-ethynylaniline, 5-amino-8-hydroxyl Quinoline, 1-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-4-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-7-amine Naphthalene, 2-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-5-amine Naphthalene, 2-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-aminobenzoic acid, 3-aminobenzoic acid, 4-amine Benzoic acid, 4-aminosalicylic acid, 5-aminosalicylic acid, 6-aminosalicylic acid, 2-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 3-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 4-aminobenzenesulfonic acid Acid, 3-amino-4,6-dihydroxypyrimidine, 2-aminophenol, 3-aminophenol, 4-aminophenol, 2-aminothiophenol, 3-aminothiophenol, 4-amine Thiophenol and so on. Two or more of these may be used, or a plurality of different terminal groups may be introduced by reacting a plurality of capping agents.

製造聚醯亞胺前驅物時,可以包含使析出固體之製程。具體而言,使反應液中的聚醯亞胺前驅物沉澱於水中,使四氫呋喃等聚醯亞胺前驅物溶解於可溶性溶劑,藉此能夠進行固體析出。 然後,對聚醯亞胺前驅物進行乾燥而能夠得到粉末狀聚醯亞胺前驅物。When the polyimide precursor is manufactured, a process for precipitation of solids may be included. Specifically, the polyimide precursor in the reaction solution is precipitated in water, and the polyimide precursor such as tetrahydrofuran is dissolved in a soluble solvent, thereby enabling solid precipitation. Then, the polyimide precursor can be dried to obtain a powdery polyimide precursor.

聚醯亞胺前驅物的重量平均分子量(Mw)較佳為18000~30000,更佳為20000~27000,進一步較佳為22000~25000。又,數平均分子量(Mn)較佳為7200~14000,更佳為8000~12000,進一步較佳為9200~11200。 上述聚醯亞胺前驅物的分散度係2.5以上為較佳,2.7以上為更佳,2.8以上為進一步較佳。聚醯亞胺前驅物的分散度的上限值並無特別限定,例如,4.5以下為較佳,4.0以下為更佳,3.8以下為進一步較佳,3.2以下為進一步較佳,3.1以下為更進一步較佳,3.0以下為更進一步較佳,2.95以下為尤其進一步較佳。The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polyimide precursor is preferably 18,000 to 30,000, more preferably 20,000 to 27,000, and still more preferably 22,000 to 25,000. In addition, the number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably 7,200 to 14,000, more preferably 8,000 to 12,000, and still more preferably 9200 to 11200. The dispersion degree of the polyimide precursor is preferably 2.5 or more, more preferably 2.7 or more, and even more preferably 2.8 or more. The upper limit of the degree of dispersion of the polyimide precursor is not particularly limited. For example, 4.5 or less is preferred, 4.0 or less is more preferred, 3.8 or less is more preferred, 3.2 or less is more preferred, and 3.1 or less is more preferred. More preferably, 3.0 or less is even more preferable, and 2.95 or less is especially more preferable.

(聚醯亞胺) 作為聚醯亞胺,只要是具有醯亞胺環之高分子化合物,則並無特別限定。聚醯亞胺係由下述式(4)表示之化合物為較佳,係由式(4)表示之化合物,且具有聚合性基之化合物為更佳。 式(4) [化學式14]

Figure 02_image027
式(4)中,R131 表示2價有機基,R132 表示4價有機基。 當聚醯亞胺係聚合性基時,R131 及R132 中的至少一方可以具有聚合性基,如下述式(4-1)或式(4-2)所示那樣可以於聚醯亞胺的末端具有聚合性基。(Polyimine) The polyimine is not particularly limited as long as it is a polymer compound having an imine ring. Polyimine is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (4), is a compound represented by the formula (4), and more preferably has a polymerizable group. Formula (4) [Chemical Formula 14]
Figure 02_image027
In formula (4), R 131 represents a divalent organic group, and R 132 represents a tetravalent organic group. In the case of a polyimide-based polymerizable group, at least one of R 131 and R 132 may have a polymerizable group, as shown in the following formula (4-1) or formula (4-2). The end has a polymerizable group.

式(4-1) [化學式15]

Figure 02_image029
式(4-1)中,R133 係聚合性基,其他基團與式(4)的定義相同。Formula (4-1) [Chemical Formula 15]
Figure 02_image029
In the formula (4-1), R 133 is a polymerizable group, and other groups have the same definitions as in the formula (4).

式(4-2) [化學式16]

Figure 02_image031
式(4-2)中,R134 及R135 中的至少一個係聚合性基,另一個係有機基,其他基團與式(4)的定義相同。Formula (4-2) [Chemical formula 16]
Figure 02_image031
In formula (4-2), at least one of R 134 and R 135 is a polymerizable group, the other is an organic group, and the other groups have the same definitions as in formula (4).

關於由聚醯亞胺具有為較佳之聚合性基,於上述聚醯亞胺前驅物中,與以式(2)中的R113 及R114 可以含有之聚合性基進行說明之聚合性基的定義相同。Regarding the preferred polymerizable group of polyimine, in the above-mentioned polyimine precursor, the difference between the polymerizable group described by the polymerizable group that R 113 and R 114 in formula (2) may contain The definition is the same.

式(4)中的R131 表示2價有機基。作為2價有機基,例示與式(2)中的R111 相同的2價有機基,較佳範圍亦相同。 又,作為R131 ,可列舉去除二胺的胺基之後殘留之二胺殘基。作為二胺,可列舉脂肪族、環式脂肪族或芳香族二胺等。作為具體例,可列舉聚醯亞胺前驅物的式(2)中的R111 的例。R 131 in the formula (4) represents a divalent organic group. As the divalent organic group, the same divalent organic group as R 111 in formula (2) is exemplified, and the preferred range is also the same. Moreover, as R 131 , the diamine residue remaining after removing the amine group of the diamine can be mentioned. Examples of diamines include aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, or aromatic diamines. As a specific example, an example of R 111 in the formula (2) of the polyimide precursor can be cited.

從更加有效地抑制燒成時產生翹曲之方面考慮,式(4)中的R131 係於主鏈具有至少兩個以上的伸烷基二醇單元之二胺殘基為較佳。更佳為於一分子中組合乙二醇鏈、丙二醇鏈中的任一個或兩個而包含兩個以上之二胺殘基,進一步較佳為不包含芳香環之二胺殘基。Generating warpage considered aspect more effectively suppress the firing formula R 131 line (4) has at least two diamine residue of alkylene glycol units of the main chain is preferred. It is more preferable to combine any one or two of an ethylene glycol chain and a propylene glycol chain in one molecule to include two or more diamine residues, and still more preferably a diamine residue that does not include an aromatic ring.

作為於一分子中組合乙二醇鏈、丙二醇鏈中的任一個或兩個而包含兩個以上之二胺,可列舉與能夠衍生式(2)中的R111 之二胺相同的具體例等,但並不限定於此。As a diamine that combines any one or two of an ethylene glycol chain and a propylene glycol chain in one molecule to include two or more diamines, the same specific examples as the diamine capable of derivatizing R 111 in formula (2) can be cited. , But not limited to this.

式(4)中的R132 表示4價有機基。作為由R132 表示之4價有機基,例示與式(2)中的R115 相同者,較佳範圍亦相同。 例如,作為式(2)中的R115 而例示之下述結構的4價有機基的4個鍵結子與上述式(4)中的4個-C(=O)-的一部分鍵結而形成縮合環。 [化學式17]

Figure 02_image033
R 132 in formula (4) represents a tetravalent organic group. As the tetravalent organic group represented by R 132 , the same as R 115 in formula (2) is exemplified, and the preferred range is also the same. For example, the four bonds of the tetravalent organic group of the following structure exemplified as R 115 in the formula (2) are bonded to a part of the four -C(=O)- in the above formula (4) to form Condensed ring. [Chemical formula 17]
Figure 02_image033

作為式(4)中的R132 的例,可列舉從四羧酸二酐去除酐基之後殘存之四羧酸殘基等。作為具體例,可列舉聚醯亞胺前驅物的式(2)中的R115 的例。從硬化膜的強度的觀點考慮,R132 係具有1~4個芳香環之芳香族二胺殘基為較佳。Examples of R 132 in formula (4) include tetracarboxylic acid residues remaining after removing anhydride groups from tetracarboxylic dianhydride. As a specific example, an example of R 115 in formula (2) of the polyimide precursor can be cited. From the viewpoint of the strength of the cured film, R 132 is preferably an aromatic diamine residue having 1 to 4 aromatic rings.

式(4)中的R131 和R132 中的至少一個具有羥基亦為較佳。更具體而言,作為式(4)中的R131 ,以2,2-雙(3-羥基-4-胺基苯基)丙烷、2,2-雙(3-羥基-4-胺基苯基)六氟丙烷、2,2-雙(3-胺基-4-羥基苯基)丙烷、2,2-雙(3-胺基-4-羥基苯基)六氟丙烷、上述(DA-1)~(DA-18)作為較佳例而例舉。作為式(4)中的R132 ,以上述(DAA-1)~(DAA-5)作為較佳例而例舉。It is also preferable that at least one of R 131 and R 132 in the formula (4) has a hydroxyl group. More specifically, as R 131 in the formula (4), 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl) Base) hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)hexafluoropropane, the above (DA- 1) ~ (DA-18) are cited as preferred examples. As R 132 in the formula (4), the above-mentioned (DAA-1) to (DAA-5) are exemplified as preferable examples.

又,聚醯亞胺於結構單元中具有氟原子亦為較佳。聚醯亞胺中的氟原子含量係10質量%以上為較佳,進而20質量%以下為較佳。Furthermore, it is also preferable that the polyimide has a fluorine atom in the structural unit. The fluorine atom content in the polyimide is preferably 10% by mass or more, and more preferably 20% by mass or less.

又,以提高與基板的黏附性為目的,可以對聚醯亞胺共聚具有矽氧烷結構之脂肪族基。具體而言,作為用於導入具有矽氧烷結構之脂肪族基之二胺成分,可列舉雙(3-胺基丙基)四甲基二矽氧烷、雙(對胺基苯基)八甲基五矽氧烷等。In addition, for the purpose of improving the adhesion to the substrate, an aliphatic group having a siloxane structure can be copolymerized with polyimide. Specifically, as the diamine component used to introduce an aliphatic group having a silicone structure, bis(3-aminopropyl)tetramethyldisiloxane, bis(p-aminophenyl) Methylpentasiloxane etc.

又,為了提高感光性樹脂組成物的保存穩定性,用單胺、酸酐、單羧酸、單酸氯化物、單活性酯化合物等封端劑密封聚醯亞胺的主鏈末端為較佳。該些中,使用單胺為更佳。作為單胺的較佳的化合物,可列舉苯胺、2-乙炔基苯胺、3-乙炔基苯胺、4-乙炔基苯胺、5-胺基-8-羥基喹啉、1-羥基-7-胺基萘、1-羥基-6-胺基萘、1-羥基-5-胺基萘、1-羥基-4-胺基萘、2-羥基-7-胺基萘、2-羥基-6-胺基萘、2-羥基-5-胺基萘、1-羧基-7-胺基萘、1-羧基-6-胺基萘、1-羧基-5-胺基萘、2-羧基-7-胺基萘、2-羧基-6-胺基萘、2-羧基-5-胺基萘、2-胺基苯甲酸、3-胺基苯甲酸、4-胺基苯甲酸、4-胺基水楊酸、5-胺基水楊酸、6-胺基水楊酸、2-胺基苯磺酸、3-胺基苯磺酸、4-胺基苯磺酸、3-胺基-4,6-二羥基嘧啶、2-胺基苯酚、3-胺基苯酚、4-胺基苯酚、2-胺基硫苯酚、3-胺基硫苯酚、4-胺基硫苯酚等。可以將該些使用兩種以上,亦可以藉由使複數個封端劑反應而導入複數個不同的末端基。Moreover, in order to improve the storage stability of the photosensitive resin composition, it is preferable to seal the main chain end of the polyimide with a blocking agent such as a monoamine, an acid anhydride, a monocarboxylic acid, a monoacid chloride, and a monoactive ester compound. Among these, it is more preferable to use monoamine. Preferred compounds of monoamines include aniline, 2-ethynylaniline, 3-ethynylaniline, 4-ethynylaniline, 5-amino-8-hydroxyquinoline, 1-hydroxy-7-amino Naphthalene, 1-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-4-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene Naphthalene, 2-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene Naphthalene, 2-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-aminobenzoic acid, 3-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminosalicylic acid , 5-aminosalicylic acid, 6-aminosalicylic acid, 2-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 3-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 4-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 3-amino-4,6- Dihydroxypyrimidine, 2-aminophenol, 3-aminophenol, 4-aminophenol, 2-aminothiophenol, 3-aminothiophenol, 4-aminothiophenol, etc. Two or more of these may be used, or a plurality of different terminal groups may be introduced by reacting a plurality of capping agents.

聚醯亞胺的醯亞胺化率係85%以上為較佳,90%以上為更佳。醯亞胺化率係85%以上,藉此因加熱而被醯亞胺化時產生的閉環所引起之膜收縮變小,能夠抑制產生基板翹曲。The imidization rate of polyimide is preferably 85% or more, and more preferably 90% or more. The imidization rate is 85% or more, whereby the film shrinkage caused by the closed loop generated when the imidization is heated by heating is reduced, and the occurrence of substrate warping can be suppressed.

聚醯亞胺不僅包含全部係一種R131 或R132 之由上述式(4)表示之重複單元,還可以包含R131 或R132 的兩個以上的不同的重複單元。又,除了由上述式(4)表示之重複單元以外,聚苯并噁唑還可以包含另一種重複單元。Polyimide based only one kind comprising all R or R 131 is the repeating unit represented by the above formula (4) of 132, may also comprise two or more R 132 or R 131 is different from the repeating units. Furthermore, in addition to the repeating unit represented by the above formula (4), the polybenzoxazole may contain another repeating unit.

關於聚醯亞胺,可以與對聚醯亞胺前驅物進行合成之後,加熱而使其環化來製造,亦可以直接對聚醯亞胺進行合成。 聚醯亞胺能夠利用如下方法來合成,亦即得到聚醯亞胺前驅物,並利用已知醯亞胺反應法使其完全醯亞胺化之方法或於途中停止醯亞胺化反應,並導入一部分醯亞胺結構之方法、進而將完全醯亞胺化之聚合物和該聚醯亞胺前驅物進行粉碎,藉此導入一部分醯亞胺結構之方法。Regarding the polyimide, it can be produced by synthesizing the polyimide precursor and then heating and cyclizing it, or it can be synthesized directly. Polyimine can be synthesized by the following method, that is, the polyimine precursor is obtained, and the known method of the imine reaction method is used to complete the imidization method or the imidization reaction is stopped on the way, and A method of introducing a part of the imine structure, and then a method of pulverizing the completely imidized polymer and the polyimide precursor, thereby introducing a part of the imine structure.

作為聚醯亞胺的市售品,例示Durimide(註冊商標)284(Fujifilm Corporation製)、Matrimide5218(HUNTSMAN製)。As a commercially available product of polyimide, Durimide (registered trademark) 284 (manufactured by Fujifilm Corporation) and Matrimide 5218 (manufactured by HUNTSMAN) are exemplified.

聚醯亞胺的重量平均分子量(Mw)係5,000~70,000為較佳,8,000~50,000為更佳,10,000~30,000為特佳。藉由將重量平均分子量設為5,000以上,能夠提高硬化後的膜的耐彎折性。為了得到機械特性優異之硬化膜,重量平均分子量係20,000以上為更佳。又,當含有兩種以上的聚醯亞胺時,至少一種聚醯亞胺的重量平均分子量係上述範圍為較佳。The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polyimide is preferably 5,000 to 70,000, more preferably 8,000 to 50,000, and particularly preferably 10,000 to 30,000. By setting the weight average molecular weight to 5,000 or more, the bending resistance of the cured film can be improved. In order to obtain a cured film with excellent mechanical properties, the weight average molecular weight is more preferably 20,000 or more. Moreover, when two or more types of polyimines are contained, it is preferable that the weight average molecular weight of at least one type of polyimines is within the above-mentioned range.

(聚苯并噁唑前驅物) 聚苯并噁唑前驅物中,其種類等並無特別限定,包含由下述式(3)表示之重複單元為較佳。 式(3) [化學式18]

Figure 02_image035
式(3)中,R121 表示2價有機基,R122 表示4價有機基,R123 及R124 分別獨立地表示氫原子或1價有機基。(Polybenzoxazole Precursor) The polybenzoxazole precursor is not particularly limited in its kind and the like, but preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the following formula (3). Formula (3) [Chemical Formula 18]
Figure 02_image035
In the formula (3), R 121 represents a divalent organic group, R 122 represents a tetravalent organic group, and R 123 and R 124 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.

式(3)中的R123 及R124 分別與式(2)中的R113 的定義相同,較佳範圍亦相同。亦即,式(3)中的R123 及R124 中的至少一個係聚合性基為較佳。R 123 and R 124 in formula (3) have the same definitions as R 113 in formula (2), and their preferred ranges are also the same. That is, at least one of R 123 and R 124 in formula (3) is preferably a polymerizable group.

式(3)中的R121 表示2價有機基。作為由R121 表示之2價有機基,包含脂肪族基及芳香族基中的至少一個基為較佳。作為脂肪族基,直鏈脂肪族基為較佳。R121 係二羧酸殘基為較佳。二羧酸殘基可以僅使用一種,亦可以使用兩種以上。R 121 in the formula (3) represents a divalent organic group. The divalent organic group represented by R 121 preferably contains at least one of an aliphatic group and an aromatic group. As the aliphatic group, a straight-chain aliphatic group is preferred. R 121 is preferably a dicarboxylic acid residue. Only one type of dicarboxylic acid residue may be used, or two or more types may be used.

作為二羧酸,包含脂肪族基之二羧酸及包含芳香族基之二羧酸為較佳,包含芳香族基之二羧酸為更佳。 作為包含脂肪族基之二羧酸,包含直鏈或分支(較佳為直鏈)脂肪族基之二羧酸為較佳,包括直鏈或分支(較佳為直鏈)脂肪族基和兩個COOH之二羧酸為更佳。直鏈或分支(較佳為直鏈)脂肪族基的碳數係2~30為較佳,2~25為更佳,3~20為進一步較佳,4~15為特佳,5~10為進一步較佳。直鏈脂肪族基係伸烷基為較佳。 作為包含直鏈脂肪族基之二羧酸,可列舉丙二酸、二甲基丙二酸、乙基丙二酸、異丙基丙二酸、二-正丁基丙二酸、丁二酸、四氟丁二酸、甲基丁二酸、2,2-二甲基丁二酸、2,3-二甲基丁二酸、二甲基甲基丁二酸、戊二酸、六氟戊二酸、2-甲基戊二酸、3-甲基戊二酸、2,2-二甲基戊二酸、3,3-二甲基戊二酸、3-乙基-3-甲基戊二酸、己二酸、八氟己二酸、3-甲基己二酸、庚二酸、2,2,6,6-四甲基庚二酸、辛二酸、十二氟辛二酸、壬二酸、癸二酸、十六氟癸二酸、1,9-壬二酸、十二烷二酸、十三烷二酸、十四烷二酸、十五烷二酸、十六烷二酸、十七烷二酸、十八烷二酸、十九烷二酸、二十烷二酸、二十一烷二酸、二十二烷二酸、二十三烷二酸、二十四烷二酸、二十五烷二酸、二十六烷二酸、二十七烷二酸、二十八烷二酸、二十九烷二酸、三十烷二酸、三十一烷二酸、三十二烷二酸、二甘醇酸及由下述式表示之二羧酸等。As the dicarboxylic acid, a dicarboxylic acid containing an aliphatic group and a dicarboxylic acid containing an aromatic group are preferable, and a dicarboxylic acid containing an aromatic group is more preferable. As dicarboxylic acids containing aliphatic groups, dicarboxylic acids containing linear or branched (preferably linear) aliphatic groups are preferred, including linear or branched (preferably linear) aliphatic groups and two A COOH dicarboxylic acid is more preferable. The carbon number system of the linear or branched (preferably linear) aliphatic group is preferably 2-30, more preferably 2-25, more preferably 3-20, particularly preferably 4-15, and 5-10 For further better. The straight-chain aliphatic group is preferably an alkylene group. Examples of dicarboxylic acids containing linear aliphatic groups include malonic acid, dimethylmalonic acid, ethylmalonic acid, isopropylmalonic acid, di-n-butylmalonic acid, and succinic acid , Tetrafluorosuccinic acid, methylsuccinic acid, 2,2-dimethylsuccinic acid, 2,3-dimethylsuccinic acid, dimethylmethylsuccinic acid, glutaric acid, hexafluoro Glutaric acid, 2-methylglutaric acid, 3-methylglutaric acid, 2,2-dimethylglutaric acid, 3,3-dimethylglutaric acid, 3-ethyl-3-methyl Glutaric acid, adipic acid, octafluoroadipic acid, 3-methyladipic acid, pimelic acid, 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpimelic acid, suberic acid, dodecafluorooctane Diacid, azelaic acid, sebacic acid, hexadecafluorosebacic acid, 1,9-azelaic acid, dodecanedioic acid, tridecanedioic acid, tetradecanedioic acid, pentadecanedioic acid, Hexadecanedioic acid, heptadecanedioic acid, octadecanedioic acid, nonadecanedioic acid, eicosanedioic acid, behenicanedioic acid, behenedioic acid, tricosanedioic acid , Tetracosanedioic acid, pentadecanedioic acid, hexadecanedioic acid, hexadecanedioic acid, octadecanedioic acid, nonacosanedioic acid, triaconanedioic acid, three Undecanedioic acid, tridodecanedioic acid, diglycolic acid, dicarboxylic acid represented by the following formula, etc.

[化學式19]

Figure 02_image037
(式中,Z係碳數1~6的烴基,n係1~6的整數。)[Chemical formula 19]
Figure 02_image037
(In the formula, Z is a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and n is an integer of 1 to 6.)

作為包含芳香族基之二羧酸,具有以下的芳香族基之二羧酸為較佳,僅包含以下芳香族基和兩個COOH之二羧酸為更佳。As the dicarboxylic acid containing the aromatic group, the dicarboxylic acid having the following aromatic group is preferable, and the dicarboxylic acid containing only the following aromatic group and two COOH is more preferable.

[化學式20]

Figure 02_image039
上述芳香族基中,A表示選自包括-CH2 -、-O-、-S-、-SO2 -、-CO-、-NHCO-、-C(CF32 -及-C(CH32 -之組中之2價基團。[Chemical formula 20]
Figure 02_image039
In the above aromatic group, A represents selected from the group consisting of -CH 2 -, -O-, -S-, -SO 2 -, -CO-, -NHCO-, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -and -C(CH 3 ) A divalent group in the group 2 -.

作為包含芳香族基之二羧酸的具體例,4,4’-羰基二苯甲酸、4,4’-二羧基二苯基醚及對苯二酸為較佳。As specific examples of dicarboxylic acids containing aromatic groups, 4,4'-carbonyldibenzoic acid, 4,4'-dicarboxydiphenyl ether, and terephthalic acid are preferred.

式(3)中的R122 表示4價有機基。作為由R122 表示之4價有機基,例示與上述式(2)中的R115 相同者,較佳範圍亦相同。 式(3)中的R122 進而係源自二胺基酚衍生物之基團為較佳。作為源自二胺基酚衍生物之基團,例如,可列舉3,3’-二胺基-4,4’-二羥基聯苯、4,4’-二胺基-3,3’-二羥基聯苯、3,3’-二胺基-4,4’-二羥基二苯基碸、4,4’-二胺基-3,3’-二羥基二苯基碸、雙-(3-胺基-4-羥基苯基)甲烷、2,2-雙-(3-胺基-4-羥基苯基)丙烷、2,2-雙-(3-胺基-4-羥基苯基)六氟丙烷、2,2-雙-(4-胺基-3-羥基苯基)六氟丙烷、雙-(4-胺基-3-羥基苯基)甲烷、2,2-雙-(4-胺基-3-羥基苯基)丙烷、4,4’-二胺基-3,3’-二羥基二苯甲酮、3,3’-二胺基-4,4’-二羥基二苯甲酮、4,4’-二胺基-3,3’-二羥基二苯醚、3,3’-二胺基-4,4’-二羥基二苯醚、1,4-二胺基-2,5-二羥基苯、1,3-二胺基-2,4-二羥基苯、1,3-二胺基-4,6-二羥基苯等。該些雙胺基苯酚可單獨使用或混合使用。R 122 in the formula (3) represents a tetravalent organic group. As the tetravalent organic group represented by R 122 , the same as R 115 in the above formula (2) is exemplified, and the preferred range is also the same. R 122 in formula (3) is further preferably a group derived from a diaminophenol derivative. As the group derived from diaminophenol derivatives, for example, 3,3'-diamino-4,4'-dihydroxybiphenyl, 4,4'-diamino-3,3'- Dihydroxybiphenyl, 3,3'-diamino-4,4'-dihydroxydiphenyl sulfide, 4,4'-diamino-3,3'-dihydroxydiphenyl sulfide, bis-( 3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)methane, 2,2-bis-(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)propane, 2,2-bis-(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl) ) Hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis-(4-amino-3-hydroxyphenyl)hexafluoropropane, bis-(4-amino-3-hydroxyphenyl)methane, 2,2-bis-( 4-amino-3-hydroxyphenyl) propane, 4,4'-diamino-3,3'-dihydroxybenzophenone, 3,3'-diamino-4,4'-dihydroxy Benzophenone, 4,4'-diamino-3,3'-dihydroxydiphenyl ether, 3,3'-diamino-4,4'-dihydroxydiphenyl ether, 1,4-di Amino-2,5-dihydroxybenzene, 1,3-diamino-2,4-dihydroxybenzene, 1,3-diamino-4,6-dihydroxybenzene, etc. These diaminophenols can be used alone or in combination.

二胺基酚衍生物中,具有下述芳香族基之二胺基酚衍生物為較佳。Among diaminophenol derivatives, diaminophenol derivatives having the following aromatic groups are preferred.

[化學式21]

Figure 02_image041
上述式中,X1 表示-O-、-S-、-C(CF32 -、-CH2 -、-SO2 -或-NHCO-。[Chemical formula 21]
Figure 02_image041
In the above formula, X 1 represents -O-, -S-, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, -CH 2 -, -SO 2 -or -NHCO-.

二胺基酚衍生物例如由式(A-s)表示。 [化學式22]

Figure 02_image043
The diaminophenol derivative is represented by formula (As), for example. [Chemical formula 22]
Figure 02_image043

式(A-s)中,R1 係選自氫原子、伸烷基、經取代伸烷基、-O-、-S-、-SO2 -、-CO-、-NHCO-、單鍵或下述式(A-sc)的組中之有機基。 式(A-s)中,R2 係氫原子、烷基、烷氧基、醯氧基、環狀烷基中的任一個,可以相同亦可以不同。 式(A-s)中,R3 係氫原子、直鏈或分支烷基、烷氧基、醯氧基、環狀烷基中的任一個,可以相同亦可以不同。In formula (As), R 1 is selected from hydrogen atom, alkylene, substituted alkylene, -O-, -S-, -SO 2 -, -CO-, -NHCO-, single bond or the following The organic group in the group of formula (A-sc). In the formula (As), R 2 is any one of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, and a cyclic alkyl group, which may be the same or different. In the formula (As), R 3 is any one of a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, and a cyclic alkyl group, and may be the same or different.

式(A-sc) [化學式23]

Figure 02_image045
(式(A-sc)中,*表示與由上述式(A-s)表示之二胺基酚衍生物的胺基苯酚的芳香環鍵結之情況。)Formula (A-sc) [Chemical formula 23]
Figure 02_image045
(In the formula (A-sc), * indicates the condition of bonding to the aromatic ring of the aminophenol of the diaminophenol derivative represented by the above formula (As).)

上述式(A-s)中,酚性羥基的鄰位亦即認為R3 亦具有取代基,可使醯胺鍵的羰基碳與羥基的距離更接近,並從進一步提高於低溫下硬化時成為高環化率之效果的方面考慮,為特佳。In the above formula (As), the ortho position of the phenolic hydroxyl group, that is, R 3 is considered to also have a substituent, which can make the distance between the carbonyl carbon of the amide bond and the hydroxyl group closer, and it will become a high ring when hardened at low temperature. Considering the effect of reduction rate, it is particularly good.

又,上述式(A-s)中,R2 係烷基,且R3 係烷基時,能夠維持針對i射線的高透明性和於低溫下硬化時成為高環化率之效果,因此為較佳。In addition, in the above formula (As), when R 2 is an alkyl group and R 3 is an alkyl group, it can maintain high transparency to i-rays and has the effect of achieving a high cyclization rate when cured at low temperature, so it is preferable .

又,上述式(A-s)中,R1 係伸烷基或經取代伸烷基為進一步較佳。作為由R1 表示之伸烷基及經取代伸烷基的具體例,可列舉-CH2 -、-CH(CH3 )-、-C(CH32 -、-CH(CH2 CH3 )-、-C(CH3 )(CH2 CH3 )-、-C(CH2 CH3 )(CH2 CH3 )-、-CH(CH2 CH2 CH3 )-、-C(CH3 )(CH2 CH2 CH3 )-、-CH(CH(CH32 )-、-C(CH3 )(CH(CH32 )-、-CH(CH2 CH2 CH2 CH3 )-、-C(CH3 )(CH2 CH2 CH2 CH3 )-、-CH(CH2 CH(CH32 )-、-C(CH3 )(CH2 CH(CH32 )-、-CH(CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH3 )-、-C(CH3 )(CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH3 )-、-CH(CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH3 )-、-C(CH3 )(CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH3 )-等,其中-CH2 -、-CH(CH3 )-、-C(CH32 -亦可維持針對i射線的高透明性和於低溫下硬化時成為高環化率之效果的同時能夠得到相對於溶劑具有充分的溶解性,且平衡優異之聚苯并噁唑前驅物,因此為更佳。Furthermore, in the above formula (As), R 1 is an alkylene group or a substituted alkylene group is more preferred. Specific examples of the alkylene and substituted alkylene represented by R 1 include -CH 2 -, -CH(CH 3 )-, -C(CH 3 ) 2 -, -CH(CH 2 CH 3 ) -, -C (CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH 3 ) -, -C (CH 2 CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH 3 )-, -CH (CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) -, -C (CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) -, -CH (CH (CH 3 ) 2 ) -, -C (CH 3 ) (CH (CH 3 ) 2 ) -, -CH (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) -, -C (CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) -, -CH (CH 2 CH (CH 3 ) 2 ) -, -C (CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH (CH 3 ) 2 ) -, -CH (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) -, -C (CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) -, -CH (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) -, -C (CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 )-etc., where -CH 2 -, -CH (CH 3 ) -, -C (CH 3 ) 2 -It can also maintain high transparency to i-rays and the effect of high cyclization rate when cured at low temperature, while obtaining a polybenzoxazole precursor with sufficient solubility in solvents and excellent balance, Therefore it is better.

作為由上述式(A-s)表示之二胺基酚衍生物的製造方法,例如,能夠參閱日本特開2013-256506號公報的0085~0094段及實施例1(0189~0190段),並將該些內容編入本說明書中。As a method of producing the diaminophenol derivative represented by the above formula (As), for example, refer to paragraphs 0085 to 0094 of JP 2013-256506 A and Example 1 (paragraphs 0189 to 0190), and compare the These contents are incorporated into this manual.

作為由上述式(A-s)表示之二胺基酚衍生物的結構的具體例,可列舉日本特開2013-256506號公報的0070~0080段中所記載者,並將該些內容編入本說明書中。當然,並不限定於該些。Specific examples of the structure of the diaminophenol derivative represented by the above formula (As) include those described in paragraphs 0070 to 0080 of JP 2013-256506 A, and these contents are incorporated into this specification . Of course, it is not limited to these.

除了由上述式(3)表示之重複單元以外,聚苯并噁唑前驅物還可以包含另一種重複單元。 從能夠抑制伴隨聚苯并噁唑前驅物的閉環之基板的翹曲的方面考慮,聚苯并噁唑前驅物包含由下述式(SL)表示之二胺殘基來作為另一種重複單元為較佳。In addition to the repeating unit represented by the above formula (3), the polybenzoxazole precursor may also include another repeating unit. From the viewpoint of suppressing the warpage of the substrate accompanying the ring closure of the polybenzoxazole precursor, the polybenzoxazole precursor contains a diamine residue represented by the following formula (SL) as another repeating unit: Better.

[化學式24]

Figure 02_image047
式(SL)中,Z具有a結構和b結構,R1s 係氫原子或碳數1~10的烴基,R2s 係碳數1~10的烴基,R3s 、R4s 、R5s 、R6s 中的至少一個係芳香族基,剩餘係氫原子或碳數1~30的有機基,該些可以分別相同或不同。a結構及b結構的聚合可以係嵌段聚合或隨機聚合。關於Z部分的莫耳%,a結構係5~95莫耳%,b結構係95~5莫耳%,a結構及b結構之和係100莫耳%。[Chemical formula 24]
Figure 02_image047
In the formula (SL), Z has a structure and a structure b, R 1s is a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group with 1 to 10 carbons, R 2s is a hydrocarbon group with 1 to 10 carbons, R 3s , R 4s , R 5s , R 6s At least one of them is an aromatic group, and the remainder is a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and these may be the same or different. The polymerization of the a structure and the b structure can be block polymerization or random polymerization. Regarding the mole% of the Z part, the a structure is 5 to 95 mole%, the b structure is 95 to 5 mole%, and the sum of the a structure and the b structure is 100 mole%.

式(SL)中,作為較佳的Z,可列舉b結構中的R5s 及R6s 係苯基者。 又,由式(SL)表示之二胺殘基的分子量係400~4,000為較佳,500~3,000為更佳。將由式(SL)表示之二胺殘基的分子量設定在上述範圍,藉此能夠更加有效地降低聚苯并噁唑前驅物的脫水閉環後的彈性率,並能夠兼顧能夠抑制基板的翹曲之效果和提高溶劑溶解性之效果。In the formula (SL), as a preferable Z, R 5s and R 6s in the structure b are phenyl groups. Moreover, the molecular weight of the diamine residue represented by the formula (SL) is preferably 400 to 4,000, and more preferably 500 to 3,000. Setting the molecular weight of the diamine residue represented by the formula (SL) within the above range can more effectively reduce the elastic modulus of the polybenzoxazole precursor after dehydration and ring closure, and can also suppress the warpage of the substrate. Effect and improve solvent solubility.

作為另一種類的重複單元包含由式(SL)表示之二胺殘基時,作為重複單元包含從四羧酸二酐去除酐基之後殘存之四羧酸殘基亦為較佳。作為該種四羧酸殘基的例,可列舉式(2)中的R115 的例。When the diamine residue represented by the formula (SL) is included as another type of repeating unit, it is also preferable to include the tetracarboxylic acid residue remaining after removing the anhydride group from the tetracarboxylic dianhydride as the repeating unit. As an example of such a tetracarboxylic acid residue, an example of R 115 in formula (2) can be given.

聚苯并噁唑前驅物的重量平均分子量(Mw)中,例如使用後述組成物時,較佳為18000~30000,更佳為20000~29000,進一步較佳為22000~28000。又,數平均分子量(Mn)較佳為7200~14000,更佳為8000~12000,進一步較佳為9200~11200。 上述聚苯并噁唑前驅物的分散度係1.4以上為較佳,1.5以上為更佳,1.6以上為進一步較佳。聚苯并噁唑前驅物的分散度的上限值並無特別限定,例如,2.6以下為較佳,2.5以下為更佳,2.4以下為進一步較佳,2.3以下為進一步較佳,2.2以下為更進一步較佳。In the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polybenzoxazole precursor, for example, when the composition described later is used, it is preferably 18,000 to 30,000, more preferably 20,000 to 29,000, and still more preferably 22,000 to 28,000. In addition, the number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably 7,200 to 14,000, more preferably 8,000 to 12,000, and still more preferably 9200 to 11200. The dispersion degree of the polybenzoxazole precursor is preferably 1.4 or more, more preferably 1.5 or more, and even more preferably 1.6 or more. The upper limit of the degree of dispersion of the polybenzoxazole precursor is not particularly limited. For example, 2.6 or less is preferable, 2.5 or less is more preferable, 2.4 or less is more preferable, 2.3 or less is more preferable, and 2.2 or less is Even more preferable.

(聚苯并噁唑) 作為聚苯并噁唑,只要是具有苯并噁唑環之高分子化合物,則並無特別限定。聚苯并噁唑係由下述式(X)表示之化合物為較佳,由下述式(X)表示之化合物,且具有聚合性基之化合物為更佳。 [化學式25]

Figure 02_image049
式(X)中,R133 表示2價有機基,R134 表示4價有機基。 當具有聚合性基時,R133 及R134 中的至少一個可以具有聚合性基,如由下述式(X-1)或式(X-2)表示那樣可以於聚苯并噁唑的末端具有聚合性基。(Polybenzoxazole) The polybenzoxazole is not particularly limited as long as it is a polymer compound having a benzoxazole ring. The polybenzoxazole is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (X), and a compound represented by the following formula (X), and a compound having a polymerizable group is more preferred. [Chemical formula 25]
Figure 02_image049
In formula (X), R 133 represents a divalent organic group, and R 134 represents a tetravalent organic group. When it has a polymerizable group, at least one of R 133 and R 134 may have a polymerizable group, and may be at the end of the polybenzoxazole as represented by the following formula (X-1) or formula (X-2) Has a polymerizable group.

式(X-1) [化學式26]

Figure 02_image051
式(X-1)中,R135 及R136 中的至少一個係聚合性基,另一個係有機基,另一基團與式(X)的定義相同。Formula (X-1) [Chemical formula 26]
Figure 02_image051
In the formula (X-1), at least one of R 135 and R 136 is a polymerizable group, the other is an organic group, and the other group has the same definition as the formula (X).

式(X-2) [化學式27]

Figure 02_image053
式(X-2)中,R137 係聚合性基,其他為取代基,其他基團與式(X)的定義相同。Formula (X-2) [Chemical Formula 27]
Figure 02_image053
In the formula (X-2), R137 is a polymerizable group, the others are substituents, and the other groups have the same definitions as in the formula (X).

由聚苯并噁唑具有為較佳之聚合性基與以由上述聚醯亞胺前驅物具有之聚合性基進行說明之聚合性基的定義相同。The polymerizable group preferably possessed by polybenzoxazole has the same definition as the polymerizable group described by the polymerizable group possessed by the polyimide precursor described above.

R133 表示2價有機基。作為2價有機基,可列舉脂肪族基或芳香族基。作為具體例,可列舉聚苯并噁唑前驅物的式(3)中的R121 的例。又,該較佳的例與R121 的定義相同。R 133 represents a divalent organic group. As a divalent organic group, an aliphatic group or an aromatic group can be mentioned. As a specific example, an example of R 121 in the formula (3) of the polybenzoxazole precursor can be cited. In addition, this preferred example has the same definition as R 121 .

R134 表示4價有機基。作為4價有機基,可列舉聚苯并噁唑前驅物的式(3)中的R122 的例。又,該較佳的例與R122 的定義相同。 例如,作為R122 例示之4價有機基的4個鍵結子與上述式(X)中的氮原子、氧原子鍵結而形成縮合環。例如,當R134 係下述有機基時,形成下述結構。 [化學式28]

Figure 02_image055
R 134 represents a tetravalent organic group. Examples of the tetravalent organic group include R 122 in the formula (3) of the polybenzoxazole precursor. In addition, this preferred example has the same definition as R 122 . For example, four bonds of the tetravalent organic group exemplified as R 122 are bonded to the nitrogen atom and oxygen atom in the above formula (X) to form a condensed ring. For example, when R 134 is the following organic group, the following structure is formed. [Chemical formula 28]
Figure 02_image055

聚苯并噁唑的噁唑化率係85%以上為較佳,90%以上為更佳。藉由噁唑化率係85%以上,因加熱而噁唑化時產生之閉環引起之膜收縮變小,能夠有效地抑制產生翹曲。The oxazolation rate of polybenzoxazole is preferably 85% or more, and more preferably 90% or more. With the oxazolidization rate being 85% or more, the film shrinkage caused by the closed loop generated during oxazolidization due to heating is reduced, and the warpage can be effectively suppressed.

聚苯并噁唑不僅包含全部基於一種R131 或R132 之由上述式(X)表示之重複單元,還可以包含包括兩個以上的不同的R131 或R132 基團之由上述式(X)表示之重複單元。又,除了由上述式(X)表示之重複單元以外,聚苯并噁唑還可以包含另一種重複單元。Polybenzoxazole not only contains all of the repeating units represented by the above formula (X) based on one kind of R 131 or R 132 , but can also include two or more different R 131 or R 132 groups that are represented by the above formula (X ) Represents the repeating unit. Furthermore, in addition to the repeating unit represented by the above formula (X), the polybenzoxazole may also include another repeating unit.

聚苯并噁唑例如藉由使二胺基酚衍生物與選自包含R133 之二羧酸及上述二羧酸的二羧酸二氯化物及二羧酸衍生物等中之化合物反應而得到聚苯并噁唑前驅物,並利用已知噁唑化反應法使其噁唑化而得到。 此外,當為二羧酸時,為了提高反應收率等,可以使用使1-羥基-1,2,3-苯并三唑等預先反應之活性酯型二羧酸衍生物。Polybenzoxazole is obtained, for example, by reacting a diaminophenol derivative with a compound selected from the group consisting of dicarboxylic acids containing R 133 and dicarboxylic acid dichlorides and dicarboxylic acid derivatives of the above-mentioned dicarboxylic acids. The polybenzoxazole precursor is obtained by oxazolation using a known oxazolation reaction method. In addition, when it is a dicarboxylic acid, in order to increase the reaction yield, etc., an active ester-type dicarboxylic acid derivative that has been reacted in advance with 1-hydroxy-1,2,3-benzotriazole and the like can be used.

聚苯并噁唑的重量平均分子量(Mw)係5,000~70,000為較佳,8,000~50,000為更佳,10,000~30,000為特佳。藉由將重量平均分子量設為5,000以上,能夠提高硬化後的膜的耐彎折性。為了得到機械特性優異之硬化膜,重量平均分子量係20,000以上為更佳。又,當含有兩種以上的聚苯并噁唑時,至少一種聚苯并噁唑的重量平均分子量係上述範圍為較佳。The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of polybenzoxazole is preferably 5,000 to 70,000, more preferably 8,000 to 50,000, and particularly preferably 10,000 to 30,000. By setting the weight average molecular weight to 5,000 or more, the bending resistance of the cured film can be improved. In order to obtain a cured film with excellent mechanical properties, the weight average molecular weight is more preferably 20,000 or more. Moreover, when two or more polybenzoxazoles are contained, the weight average molecular weight of at least one polybenzoxazole is preferably within the above-mentioned range.

(其他感光性樹脂) 即使係上述以外的感光性樹脂,還能能應用本實施方式。作為其他樹脂,能夠使用環氧樹脂或苯酚樹脂、苯并環丁烷系樹脂。(Other photosensitive resin) Even if it is a photosensitive resin other than the above, this embodiment can also be applied. As other resins, epoxy resins, phenol resins, and benzocyclobutane-based resins can be used.

<<<聚合性化合物>>> 樹脂具有聚合性基,或者感光性樹脂組成物包含聚合性化合物為較佳。藉由該種結構,能夠形成耐熱性更加優異之硬化膜。 聚合性化合物係具有聚合性基之化合物,其能夠使用藉由自由基、酸、鹼性基團等能夠交聯反應之公知的化合物。作為聚合性基,例示以上述聚醯亞胺前驅物進行說明之聚合性基等。聚合性化合物可以僅包含一種,亦可以包含兩種以上。 關於聚合性化合物,例如係單體、預聚物、寡聚物或它們的混合物及它們的多聚體等等化學形態中的任一種。<<<Polymerizable compound>>> It is preferable that the resin has a polymerizable group, or the photosensitive resin composition contains a polymerizable compound. With this structure, a cured film with more excellent heat resistance can be formed. The polymerizable compound is a compound having a polymerizable group, and it is possible to use a known compound capable of crosslinking reaction by a radical, an acid, a basic group, or the like. As a polymerizable group, the polymerizable group etc. demonstrated using the said polyimide precursor are illustrated. The polymerizable compound may contain only one type or two or more types. Regarding the polymerizable compound, for example, it is any one of chemical forms such as monomers, prepolymers, oligomers, their mixtures, and their multimers.

本實施方式中,單體類型的聚合性化合物(以下,稱為聚合性單體)係與高分子化合物不同之化合物。聚合性單體典型地係低分子化合物,係分子量2000以下的低分子化合物為較佳,係1500以下的低分子化合物為更佳,係分子量900以下的低分子化合物為進一步較佳。此外,聚合性單體的分子量通常係100以上。 又,寡聚物類型的聚合性化合物典型地係分子量相對較低之聚合物,係鍵結有10個~100個聚合性單體之聚合物為較佳。寡聚物類型的聚合性化合物的重量平均分子量係2000~20000為較佳,2000~15000為更佳,2000~10000為最佳。In this embodiment, the monomer type polymerizable compound (hereinafter referred to as polymerizable monomer) is a compound different from the polymer compound. The polymerizable monomer is typically a low-molecular compound, and a low-molecular compound with a molecular weight of 2000 or less is preferred, a low-molecular compound with a molecular weight of 1500 or less is more preferred, and a low-molecular compound with a molecular weight of 900 or less is more preferred. In addition, the molecular weight of the polymerizable monomer is usually 100 or more. In addition, the oligomer-type polymerizable compound is typically a polymer with a relatively low molecular weight, and preferably a polymer with 10 to 100 polymerizable monomers bonded thereto. The weight average molecular weight of the oligomer type polymerizable compound is preferably 2,000 to 20,000, more preferably 2,000 to 15,000, and most preferably 2,000 to 10,000.

聚合性化合物的官能基數是指1分子中的聚合性基的數量。 從顯影性的觀點考慮,感光性樹脂組成物包含至少一種包括兩個以上的聚合性基之2官能以上的聚合性化合物為較佳,至少包含一種3官能以上的聚合性化合物為更佳。 從形成三維交聯結構而能夠提高耐熱性之方面考慮,感光性樹脂組成物包含至少一種3官能以上的聚合性化合物為較佳。又,可以係2官能以下的聚合性化合物與3官能以上的聚合性化合物的混合物。The number of functional groups of a polymerizable compound refers to the number of polymerizable groups in one molecule. From the viewpoint of developability, the photosensitive resin composition preferably contains at least one bifunctional or more polymerizable compound including two or more polymerizable groups, and more preferably contains at least one trifunctional or more polymerizable compound. From the viewpoint of forming a three-dimensional crosslinked structure and improving heat resistance, the photosensitive resin composition preferably contains at least one trifunctional or higher polymerizable compound. In addition, it may be a mixture of a bifunctional or lower polymerizable compound and a trifunctional or higher polymerizable compound.

作為聚合性化合物,包含具有烯屬不飽和鍵之基團之化合物;具有羥甲基、烷氧甲基或醯氧甲基之化合物;環氧化合物;氧雜環丁烷化合物;苯并噁嗪化合物為較佳。As a polymerizable compound, a compound containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond; a compound having a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group or an oxymethyl group; an epoxy compound; an oxetane compound; a benzoxazine Compounds are preferred.

(包含具有烯屬不飽和鍵之基團之化合物) 作為具有烯屬不飽和鍵之基團,苯乙烯基、乙烯基、(甲基)丙烯醯基及(甲基)烯丙基為較佳,(甲基)丙烯醯基為更佳。(Compounds containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond) As the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, styryl, vinyl, (meth)acrylic and (meth)allyl groups are preferred , (Meth)acrylic acid group is more preferable.

作為包含具有烯屬不飽和鍵之基團之化合物的具體例,可列舉不飽和羧酸(例如,丙烯酸、甲基丙烯酸、衣康酸、巴豆酸、異巴豆酸、馬來酸等)或其酯類、醯胺類及它們的多聚體,較佳為不飽和羧酸與多元醇的酯及不飽和羧酸與多元胺化合物的醯胺類、以及它們的多聚體。又,還可較佳地使用羥基或胺基、巰基等具有親和性取代基之不飽和羧酸酯或醯胺類與單官能或多官能異氰酸酯類或環氧類的加成反應物、與單官能或多官能的羧酸的脱水縮合反應物等。又,具有異氰酸酯基或環氧基等親電子性取代基之不飽和羧酸酯或醯胺類與單官能或多官能醇類、胺類、硫醇類的加成反應物及具有鹵素基或甲苯磺醯氧基等具有脱離性取代基之不飽和羧酸酯或醯胺類與單官能或多官能醇類、胺類、硫醇類的取代反應物亦為較佳。又,作為另一例,替代上述不飽和羧酸,能夠使用被不飽和膦酸、苯乙烯等乙烯基苯衍生物、乙烯醚、烯丙醚等取代之化合物組。Specific examples of the compound containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include unsaturated carboxylic acids (for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.) or The esters, amides, and their multimers are preferably esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and polyhydric alcohols, and amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids and polyamine compounds, and their multimers. In addition, addition reactants of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides with monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanates or epoxies and monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanates or epoxy groups with affinity substituents such as hydroxyl groups, amine groups, and mercapto groups can also be preferably used. Dehydration condensation reaction product of functional or polyfunctional carboxylic acid, etc. In addition, addition reactants of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides with electrophilic substituents such as isocyanate groups or epoxy groups and monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohols, amines, and thiols, and halogen groups or Substitution reactants of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having detachable substituents such as toluene sulfonyloxy group and monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohols, amines, and thiols are also preferred. In addition, as another example, instead of the above-mentioned unsaturated carboxylic acid, a group of compounds substituted with unsaturated phosphonic acid, vinylbenzene derivatives such as styrene, vinyl ether, allyl ether, and the like can be used.

作為多元醇與不飽和羧酸的酯的單體的具體例,作為丙烯酸酯,有乙二醇二丙烯酸酯、三乙二醇二丙烯酸酯、1,3-丁二醇二丙烯酸酯、四亞甲基二醇二丙烯酸酯、丙二醇二丙烯酸酯、新戊二醇二丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三(丙烯醯氧基丙基)醚、三羥甲基乙烷三丙烯酸酯、己二醇二丙烯酸酯、1,4-環己二醇二丙烯酸酯、四乙二醇二丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇二丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇三丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇二丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇六丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇四丙烯酸酯、山梨糖醇三丙烯酸酯、山梨糖醇四丙烯酸酯、山梨糖醇五丙烯酸酯、山梨糖醇六丙烯酸酯、三(丙烯醯氧基乙基)異三聚氰酸酯、異三聚氰酸環氧乙烷改質三丙烯酸酯、聚酯丙烯酸酯寡聚物等。As specific examples of monomers of esters of polyhydric alcohols and unsaturated carboxylic acids, as acrylates, there are ethylene glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol diacrylate, 1,3-butanediol diacrylate, and tetraethylene glycol diacrylate. Methyl glycol diacrylate, propylene glycol diacrylate, neopentyl glycol diacrylate, trimethylolpropane triacrylate, trimethylolpropane tris (propylene oxypropyl) ether, trimethylol Ethane triacrylate, hexanediol diacrylate, 1,4-cyclohexanediol diacrylate, tetraethylene glycol diacrylate, pentaerythritol diacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, dipentaerythritol diacrylate, two Pentaerythritol hexaacrylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, sorbitol triacrylate, sorbitol tetraacrylate, sorbitol pentaacrylate, sorbitol hexaacrylate, tris(acryloxyethyl) heterotrimerization Cyanate ester, isocyanuric acid ethylene oxide modified triacrylate, polyester acrylate oligomer, etc.

作為甲基丙烯酸酯,有四亞甲基二醇二甲基丙烯酸酯、三乙二醇二甲基丙烯酸酯、新戊二醇二甲基丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三甲基丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基乙烷三甲基丙烯酸酯、乙二醇二甲基丙烯酸酯、1,3-丁二醇二甲基丙烯酸酯、己二醇二甲基丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇二甲基丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇三甲基丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇四甲基丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇二甲基丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇六甲基丙烯酸酯、山梨糖醇三甲基丙烯酸酯、山梨糖醇四甲基丙烯酸酯、雙〔對(3-甲基丙烯醯氧基-2-羥基丙氧基)苯基〕二甲基甲烷、雙-〔對(甲基丙烯醯氧基乙氧基)苯基〕二甲基甲烷等。As the methacrylate, there are tetramethylene glycol dimethacrylate, triethylene glycol dimethacrylate, neopentyl glycol dimethacrylate, trimethylolpropane trimethacrylate, Trimethylolethane trimethacrylate, ethylene glycol dimethacrylate, 1,3-butanediol dimethacrylate, hexanediol dimethacrylate, pentaerythritol dimethacrylate, Pentaerythritol trimethacrylate, pentaerythritol tetramethacrylate, dipentaerythritol dimethacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate, sorbitol trimethacrylate, sorbitol tetramethacrylate, double 〔 P(3-methacryloxy-2-hydroxypropoxy)phenyl]dimethylmethane, bis-[p(methacryloxyethoxy)phenyl]dimethylmethane, etc.

作為衣康酸酯,有乙二醇二衣康酸酯、丙二醇二衣康酸酯、1,3-丁二醇二衣康酸酯、1,4-丁二醇二衣康酸酯、四亞甲基二醇二衣康酸酯、季戊四醇二衣康酸酯、山梨糖醇四衣康酸酯等。As itaconates, there are ethylene glycol diitaconate, propylene glycol diitaconate, 1,3-butanediol diitaconate, 1,4-butanediol diitaconate, four Methylene glycol diitaconate, pentaerythritol diitaconate, sorbitol tetraitaconate, etc.

作為巴豆酸酯,有乙二醇二巴豆酸酯、四亞甲基二醇二巴豆酸酯、季戊四醇二巴豆酸酯、山梨糖醇四-二巴豆酸酯等。As crotonates, there are ethylene glycol dicrotonate, tetramethylene glycol dicrotonate, pentaerythritol dicrotonate, sorbitol tetra-dicrotonate, and the like.

作為異巴豆酸酯,有乙二醇二異巴豆酸酯、季戊四醇二異巴豆酸酯、山梨糖醇四異巴豆酸酯等。As isocrotonic acid esters, there are ethylene glycol diisocrotonate, pentaerythritol diisocrotonate, sorbitol tetraisocrotonate, and the like.

作為馬來酸酯,有乙二醇二馬來酸酯、三乙二醇二馬來酸酯、季戊四醇二馬來酸酯、山梨糖醇四馬來酸酯等。Examples of maleic acid esters include ethylene glycol dimaleate, triethylene glycol dimaleate, pentaerythritol dimaleate, and sorbitol tetramaleate.

作為其他酯的例子,例如還能夠較佳地使用日本特公昭46-27926號公報、日本特公昭51-47334號公報、日本特開昭57-196231號公報記載之脂肪族醇系酯類,或日本特開昭59-5240號公報、日本特開昭59-5241號公報、日本特開平2-226149號公報中所記載之具有芳香族系骨架者、日本特開平1-165613號公報中所記載之含有胺基者等。As examples of other esters, for example, the aliphatic alcohol esters described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 46-27926, Japanese Patent Publication No. 51-47334, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 57-196231, or Those having an aromatic skeleton as described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 59-5240, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 59-5241, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2-226149, and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 1-165613 Those containing amine groups, etc.

又,作為多元胺化合物與不飽和羧酸的醯胺的單體的具體例,有亞甲基雙-丙烯醯胺、亞甲基雙-甲基丙烯醯胺、1,6-六亞甲基雙-丙烯醯胺、1,6-六亞甲基雙-甲基丙烯醯胺、二乙三胺三丙烯醯胺、伸二甲苯基雙丙烯醯胺、伸二甲苯基雙甲基丙烯醯胺等。In addition, as specific examples of monomers of polyamine compounds and amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids, there are methylene bis-acrylamide, methylene bis-methacrylamide, and 1,6-hexamethylene Bis-acrylamide, 1,6-hexamethylene bis-methacrylamide, diethylenetriamine triacrylamide, xylylene bisacrylamide, xylylene bismethacrylamide, etc.

作為其他較佳的醯胺系單體的例,可列舉日本特公昭54-21726號公報記載之具有伸環己基結構者。As examples of other preferable amide-based monomers, those having a cyclohexylene structure described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 54-21726 are cited.

又,利用異氰酸酯與羥基的加成反應所製造的胺基甲酸酯系加成聚合性單體亦適宜,作為此種具體例,例如可列舉:日本特公昭48-41708號公報中所記載之於1分子中具有2個以上的異氰酸酯基的聚異氰酸酯化合物中對由下述式表示的含有羥基的乙烯基單體進行加成而成的1分子中含有2個以上的聚合性乙烯基的乙烯基胺基甲酸酯化合物等。 CH2 =C(R4 )COOCH2 CH(R5 )OH (其中,R4 及R5 表示H或CH3 。) 又,如日本特開昭51-37193號公報、日本特公平2-32293號公報、日本特公平2-16765號公報中所記載之丙烯酸胺基甲酸酯類,或日本特公昭58-49860號公報、日本特公昭56-17654號公報、日本特公昭62-39417號公報、日本特公昭62-39418號公報記載之具有環氧乙烷系骨架的胺基甲酸酯化合物類亦為較佳。In addition, a urethane-based addition polymerizable monomer produced by the addition reaction of an isocyanate and a hydroxyl group is also suitable. As such a specific example, for example, the one described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-41708 Ethylene containing two or more polymerizable vinyl groups in one molecule, which is obtained by adding a hydroxyl-containing vinyl monomer represented by the following formula to a polyisocyanate compound having two or more isocyanate groups in one molecule Carbamate compounds and the like. CH 2 =C(R 4 )COOCH 2 CH(R 5 )OH (where R 4 and R 5 represent H or CH 3 .) Also, such as Japanese Patent Publication No. 51-37193 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2-32293 The urethane acrylates described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2-16765, or Japanese Patent Publication No. 58-49860, Japanese Patent Publication No. 56-17654, Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-39417, Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide-based skeleton described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-39418 are also preferred.

又,於本實施方式中,作為包含具有烯屬不飽和鍵之基團之化合物,還能夠較佳地使用日本特開2009-288705號公報的0095~0108段中所記載之化合物。In addition, in this embodiment, as the compound containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, the compound described in paragraphs 0095 to 0108 of JP 2009-288705 A can also be preferably used.

又,作為包含具有烯屬不飽和鍵之基團之化合物,於常壓下具有100℃以上的沸點的化合物亦較佳。作為其例,可列舉:聚乙二醇單(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚丙二醇單(甲基)丙烯酸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸苯氧基乙酯等單官能的丙烯酸酯或甲基丙烯酸酯;聚乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基乙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇五(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯、己二醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三(丙烯醯氧基丙基)醚、三(丙烯醯氧基乙基)異三聚氰酸酯、甘油或三羥甲基乙烷等在多官能醇中加成環氧乙烷或環氧丙烷後進行(甲基)丙烯酸酯化而成者,如日本特公昭48-41708號公報、日本特公昭50-6034號公報、日本特開昭51-37193號公報中所記載之(甲基)丙烯酸胺基甲酸酯類,日本特開昭48-64183號公報、日本特公昭49-43191號公報、日本特公昭52-30490號公報中所記載之聚酯丙烯酸酯類,作為環氧樹脂與(甲基)丙烯酸的反應產物的環氧丙烯酸酯類等多官能的丙烯酸酯或甲基丙烯酸酯、以及該些的混合物。另外,日本特開2008-292970號公報的0254~0257段中所記載之化合物亦適宜。又,還能夠列舉使多官能羧酸與(甲基)丙烯酸縮水甘油酯等具有環狀醚基及乙烯性不飽和基的化合物進行反應而獲得的多官能(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。 又,作為其他較佳的包含具有烯屬不飽和鍵之基團之聚合性化合物,還能夠使用日本特開2010-160418號公報、日本特開2010-129825號公報、日本專利第4364216號等中所記載之具有茀環,且具有2個以上的含有乙烯性不飽和鍵的基團的化合物或卡多(cardo)樹脂。 進而,作為其他例,還能夠列舉日本特公昭46-43946號公報、日本特公平1-40337號公報、日本特公平1-40336號公報記載之特定的不飽和化合物、或日本特開平2-25493號公報記載之乙烯基膦酸系化合物等。又,於某種情況下,適宜地使用日本特開昭61-22048號公報記載之含有全氟烷基的結構。進而,還能夠使用“Journal of the Adhesion Society of Japan”vol.20、No.7、300頁~308頁(1984年)中作為光硬化性單體及寡聚物所介紹者。In addition, as a compound containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a compound having a boiling point of 100°C or higher under normal pressure is also preferable. Examples thereof include monofunctional acrylates or methacrylates such as polyethylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate, and phenoxyethyl (meth)acrylate ; Polyethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, trimethylolethane tri(meth)acrylate, neopentyl glycol di(meth)acrylate, pentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate, pentaerythritol four (Meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate, hexanediol (meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane tris(acryloxypropyl) ) Ether, tris(acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate, glycerin or trimethylol ethane, etc. are added with ethylene oxide or propylene oxide to polyfunctional alcohols for (meth)acrylic acid Esterified, such as (meth)acrylate urethanes described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-41708, Japanese Patent Publication No. 50-6034, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 51-37193, Japan The polyester acrylates described in JP-A-48-64183, JP-A-49-43191, and JP-A-52-30490 are used as reaction products of epoxy resin and (meth)acrylic acid. Polyfunctional acrylates or methacrylates, such as epoxy acrylates, and mixtures of these. In addition, the compounds described in paragraphs 0254 to 0257 of JP 2008-292970 A are also suitable. Moreover, the polyfunctional (meth)acrylate etc. which are obtained by making the compound which has a cyclic ether group and ethylenically unsaturated group, such as a polyfunctional carboxylic acid and glycidyl (meth)acrylate react, are mentioned. In addition, as other preferable polymerizable compounds containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-160418, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-129825, Japanese Patent No. 4364216 and the like can also be used. The compound or cardo resin described has a sulphur ring and two or more ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups. Furthermore, as other examples, specific unsaturated compounds described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 46-43946, Japanese Patent Publication No. 1-40337, Japanese Patent Publication No. 1-40336, or Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2-25493 The vinyl phosphonic acid-based compounds described in the Gazette. In addition, in certain cases, the perfluoroalkyl group-containing structure described in JP 61-22048 A is suitably used. Furthermore, it is also possible to use those introduced as photocurable monomers and oligomers in "Journal of the Adhesion Society of Japan" vol. 20, No. 7, pages 300 to 308 (1984).

除上述以外,還能夠較佳地使用由下述(MO-1)~式(MO-5)表示之聚合性化合物。此外,式中,當T為氧基伸烷基時,碳原子側的末端與R鍵結。In addition to the above, polymerizable compounds represented by the following (MO-1) to (MO-5) can be preferably used. In addition, in the formula, when T is an oxyalkylene group, the end on the carbon atom side is bonded to R.

[化學式29]

Figure 02_image057
[Chemical formula 29]
Figure 02_image057

[化學式30]

Figure 02_image059
[Chemical formula 30]
Figure 02_image059

於上述的各式中,n為0~14的整數,m為1~8的整數。於分子內存在複數個的R、T可以相同亦可以不同。 由上述式(MO-1)~(MO-5)表示之聚合性化合物的每一個中,複數個R內的至少一個表示由-OC(=O)CH=CH2 或、-OC(=O)C(CH3 )=CH2 表示之基團。 於本實施方式中,作為由上述式(MO-1)~(MO-5)表示之包含具有烯屬不飽和鍵之基團之化合物的具體例,能夠較佳地使用日本特開2007-269779號公報的0248~0251段中所記載之化合物。In each of the above formulas, n is an integer of 0-14, and m is an integer of 1-8. A plurality of R and T may be the same or different in the molecule. In each of the polymerizable compounds represented by the above formulas (MO-1) to (MO-5), at least one of the plural Rs is represented by -OC (=O) CH=CH 2 or, -OC (=O ) C(CH 3 )=CH 2 represents a group. In this embodiment, as a specific example of the compound containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond represented by the above formulas (MO-1) to (MO-5), JP 2007-269779 can be preferably used The compound described in paragraphs 0248 to 0251 of the publication.

又,於日本特開平10-62986號公報中作為式(1)及(2)且與其具體例一同記載之如下化合物還能能用作聚合性化合物,該化合物係於多官能醇中加成環氧乙烷或環氧丙烷後進行(甲基)丙烯酸酯化而成的化合物。In addition, the following compounds described as formulas (1) and (2) in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-62986 and their specific examples can also be used as polymerizable compounds, which are ring-added to polyfunctional alcohols A compound formed by (meth)acrylic acid esterification after ethylene oxide or propylene oxide.

進而,還能夠採用日本特開2015-187211號公報的0104~0131段中所記載之化合物,並將該些內容編入本說明書中。尤其,作為較佳方式,例示所述公報的0128~0130段中所記載之化合物。Furthermore, the compounds described in paragraphs 0104 to 0131 of JP 2015-187211 A can also be used, and these contents can be incorporated in this specification. In particular, as a preferable aspect, the compounds described in paragraphs 0128 to 0130 of the publication are exemplified.

作為包含具有烯屬不飽和鍵之基團之化合物,二季戊四醇三丙烯酸酯(作為市售品為KAYARAD D-330;Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.製)、二季戊四醇四丙烯酸酯(作為市售品為KAYARAD D-320;Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.製)、二季戊四醇五(甲基)丙烯酸酯(作為市售品為KAYARAD D-310;Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.製)、二季戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯(作為市售品為KAYARAD DPHA;Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.製)及該些的(甲基)丙烯醯基經由乙二醇殘基、丙二醇殘基鍵結之結構為較佳。還能夠使用它們的寡聚物類型。 又,作為較佳的例,還可列舉上述式(MO-1)、式(MO-2)的季戊四醇衍生物和/或二季戊四醇衍生物。As a compound containing a group having an ethylenic unsaturated bond, dipentaerythritol triacrylate (as a commercial product is KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (as a commercial product) KAYARAD D-320; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate (as a commercially available product is KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa ( Meth) acrylate (as a commercially available product is KAYARAD DPHA; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and these (meth)acrylic acid groups are bonded via ethylene glycol residues and propylene glycol residues. good. It is also possible to use their oligomer types. Moreover, as a preferable example, the pentaerythritol derivatives and/or dipentaerythritol derivatives of the above-mentioned formula (MO-1) and (MO-2) can also be cited.

作為聚合性化合物的市售品,例如可列舉Sartomer Company, Inc製的作為具有4個伸乙氧基鏈之4官能丙烯酸酯之SR-494、作為具有4個伸乙氧基鏈之2官能丙烯酸甲酯之Sartomer Company, Inc製SR-209、Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.製的作為具有6個伸戊氧基鏈之6官能丙烯酸酯之DPCA-60、作為具有3個異伸丁氧基鏈之3官能丙烯酸酯之TPA-330、胺基甲酸酯寡聚物UAS-10、UAB-140(Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co.,Ltd製)、NK酯M-40G、NK酯4G、NK酯M-9300、NK酯A-9300、UA-7200(Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co.,Ltd製)、DPHA-40H(Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、AI-600(Kyoeisha chemical Co.,Ltd.製)、BLEMMER PME400(NOF CORPORATION.製)等。Commercial products of polymerizable compounds include, for example, SR-494 manufactured by Sartomer Company, Inc as a 4-functional acrylate having 4 ethoxy chains, and SR-494 as a difunctional acrylic having 4 ethoxy chains. SR-209 manufactured by Sartomer Company, Inc. of methyl ester, DPCA-60 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. as a 6-functional acrylate with 6 pentoxy chains, as a DPCA-60 with 3 isobutylene groups TPA-330 of trifunctional acrylate, urethane oligomer UAS-10, UAB-140 (manufactured by Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co., Ltd), NK ester M-40G, NK ester 4G, NK ester M- 9300, NK ester A-9300, UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH -600, T-600, AI-600 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), BLEMMER PME400 (manufactured by NOF CORPORATION), etc.

作為包含具有烯屬不飽和鍵之基團之化合物,如日本特公昭48-41708號公報、日本特開昭51-37193號公報、日本特公平2-32293號公報、日本特公平2-16765號公報中所記載之那樣的胺基甲酸酯丙烯酸酯類、日本特公昭58-49860號公報、日本特公昭56-17654號公報、日本特公昭62-39417號公報、日本特公昭62-39418號公報中所記載之具有環氧乙烷系骨架之胺基甲酸酯合物類亦為較佳。進而,作為聚合性化合物,還能夠使用日本特開昭63-277653號公報、日本特開昭63-260909號公報、日本特開平1-105238號公報中所記載之於分子內具有胺基結構或硫化物結構之加成聚合性單體類。As a compound containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, such as Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-41708, Japanese Patent Publication No. 51-37193, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2-32293, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2-16765 Urethane acrylates as described in the gazette, Japanese Patent Publication No. 58-49860, Japanese Patent Publication No. 56-17654, Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-39417, Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-39418 The urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide-based skeleton described in the gazette are also preferable. Furthermore, as the polymerizable compound, those having an amino group structure in the molecule or those described in JP-A 63-277653, JP-A 63-260909, and JP-A 1-105238 can also be used. Addition polymerizable monomers of sulfide structure.

包含具有烯屬不飽和鍵之基團之化合物可以係具有羧基、磺酸基、磷酸基等酸基之多官能單體。具有酸基之多官能單體中,脂肪族多羥基化合物與不飽和羧酸的酯為較佳,使脂肪族多羥基化合物的未反應的羥基與非芳香族羧酸酐反應而具有酸基之多官能單體為更佳。特佳為使脂肪族多羥基化合物的未反應的羥基與非芳香族羧酸酐反應而具有酸基之多官能單體中,脂肪族多羥基化合物係季戊四醇和/或二季戊四醇。作為市售品,例如,作為TOAGOSEI CO., LTD.製多元酸改性的丙烯酸類寡聚物,可列舉M-510、M-520等。 具有酸基之多官能單體可以單獨使用一種,亦可以混合使用兩種以上。又,依需要,可組合使用不具有酸基之多官能單體和具有酸基之多官能單體。 具有酸基之多官能單體的較佳的酸值係0.1~40mgKOH/g,特佳為5~30mgKOH/g。多官能單體的酸值只要在上述範圍內,則製造或操作性優異,進而顯影性優異。又,聚合性亦良好。The compound containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond may be a multifunctional monomer having an acid group such as a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group. Among the polyfunctional monomers with acid groups, esters of aliphatic polyhydroxy compounds and unsaturated carboxylic acids are preferred. The unreacted hydroxyl groups of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compounds react with non-aromatic carboxylic anhydrides to have many acid groups Functional monomers are more preferable. Particularly preferably, among the polyfunctional monomers having an acid group by reacting unreacted hydroxyl groups of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound with a non-aromatic carboxylic anhydride, the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol and/or dipentaerythritol. As a commercially available product, for example, as a polyacid-modified acrylic oligomer manufactured by TOAGOSEI CO., LTD., M-510, M-520, and the like can be cited. The polyfunctional monomer having an acid group may be used alone or in combination of two or more. In addition, if necessary, a multifunctional monomer having no acid group and a multifunctional monomer having an acid group can be used in combination. The preferred acid value of the polyfunctional monomer having an acid group is 0.1-40 mgKOH/g, particularly preferably 5-30 mgKOH/g. As long as the acid value of the polyfunctional monomer is within the above-mentioned range, the production and handling properties are excellent, and furthermore, the developability is excellent. Moreover, the polymerizability is also good.

從良好的聚合性和耐熱性的觀點考慮,包含具有烯屬不飽和鍵之基團之化合物的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分係1~50質量%為較佳。下限係5質量%以上為更佳。上限係30質量%以下為更佳。包含具有烯屬不飽和鍵之基團之化合物可以單獨使用一種,亦可以混合使用兩種以上。 又,樹脂與包含具有烯屬不飽和鍵之基團之化合物的質量比例(樹脂/聚合性化合物)係98/2~10/90為較佳,95/5~30/70為更佳,90/10~50/50為最佳。樹脂與包含具有烯屬不飽和鍵之基團之化合物的質量比例只要在上述範圍內,則能夠形成聚合性及耐熱性更加優異之硬化膜。From the viewpoint of good polymerizability and heat resistance, the content of the compound containing the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably 1 to 50% by mass relative to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition. The lower limit is more preferably 5% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 30% by mass or less. The compound containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond may be used singly or in combination of two or more. In addition, the mass ratio of the resin to the compound containing the ethylenically unsaturated bond (resin/polymerizable compound) is preferably 98/2 to 10/90, more preferably 95/5 to 30/70, and 90 /10~50/50 is the best. As long as the mass ratio of the resin and the compound containing the ethylenically unsaturated bond is within the above range, a cured film with more excellent polymerizability and heat resistance can be formed.

(具有羥甲基、烷氧甲基或醯氧甲基之化合物) 作為具有羥甲基、烷氧甲基或醯氧甲基之化合物,由下述式(AM1)表示之化合物為較佳。(The compound having a hydroxymethyl group, an alkoxymethyl group, or an oxymethyl group) As a compound having a hydroxymethyl group, an alkoxymethyl group, or an oxymethyl group, a compound represented by the following formula (AM1) is preferred.

式(AM1) [化學式31]

Figure 02_image061
(式中,t表示1~20的整數,R4 表示碳數1~200的t價有機基團,R5 表示由下述式(AM2)或下述式(AM3)表示之基團。)Formula (AM1) [Chemical Formula 31]
Figure 02_image061
(In the formula, t represents an integer of 1 to 20, R 4 represents a t-valent organic group having 1 to 200 carbon atoms, and R 5 represents a group represented by the following formula (AM2) or the following formula (AM3).)

式(AM2) 式(AM3) [化學式32]

Figure 02_image063
(式中,R6 表示羥基或碳數1~10的有機基團。)Formula (AM2) Formula (AM3) [Chemical formula 32]
Figure 02_image063
(In the formula, R 6 represents a hydroxyl group or an organic group with 1 to 10 carbon atoms.)

相對於聚醯亞胺前驅物等100質量份,由式(AM1)表示之化合物係5質量份以上且40質量份以下為較佳。進一步較佳為10質量份以上且35質量份以下。又,所有聚合性化合物中含有10質量%以上且90質量%以下的由下述式(AM4)表示之化合物,所有熱交聯劑中含有10質量%以上且90質量%以下的由下述式(AM5)表示之化合物亦為較佳。The compound represented by the formula (AM1) is preferably 5 parts by mass or more and 40 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor or the like. More preferably, it is 10 mass parts or more and 35 mass parts or less. In addition, all polymerizable compounds contain 10% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less of the compound represented by the following formula (AM4), and all thermal crosslinking agents contain 10% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less by the following formula The compound represented by (AM5) is also preferred.

式(AM4) [化學式33]

Figure 02_image065
(式中,R4 表示碳數1~200的2價有機基團,R5 表示由下述式(AM2)或下述式(AM3)表示之基團。)Formula (AM4) [Chemical Formula 33]
Figure 02_image065
(In the formula, R 4 represents a divalent organic group having 1 to 200 carbon atoms, and R 5 represents a group represented by the following formula (AM2) or the following formula (AM3).)

式(AM5) [化學式34]

Figure 02_image067
(式中,u表示3~8的整數,R4 表示碳數1~200的u價有機基團,R5 表示由下述式(AM2)或下述式(AM3)表示之基團。)Formula (AM5) [Chemical Formula 34]
Figure 02_image067
(In the formula, u represents an integer of 3 to 8, R 4 represents a u-valent organic group having 1 to 200 carbon atoms, and R 5 represents a group represented by the following formula (AM2) or the following formula (AM3).)

式(AM2) 式(AM3) [化學式35]

Figure 02_image069
(式中,R6 表示羥基或碳數1~10的有機基團。)Formula (AM2) Formula (AM3) [Chemical formula 35]
Figure 02_image069
(In the formula, R 6 represents a hydroxyl group or an organic group with 1 to 10 carbon atoms.)

藉由使用具有該些羥甲基等之化合物,在凹凸的基板上形成感光性組成物時,產生龜裂之情況進一步減少。又,能夠具有圖案加工性優異,5%質量減少溫度成為350℃以上,更佳為成為380℃以上的較高的耐熱性。作為由式(AM4)表示之化合物的具體例,可列舉46DMOC、46DMOEP(以上為產品名,ASAHI YUKIZAI CORPORATION製)、DML-MBPC、DML-MBOC、DML-OCHP、DML-PCHP、DML-PC、DML-PTBP、DML-34X、DML-EP、DML-POP、dimethylolBisOC-P、DML-PFP、DML-PSBP、DML-MTrisPC(以上為產品名,Honshu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.製)、NIKALAC MX-290(產品名,Sanwa Chemical Co., Ltd.製)、2,6-二甲氧基甲基-4-第三丁基苯酚(2,6-dimethoxymethyl-4-t-buthylphenol)、2,6-二甲氧基甲基-對甲酚(2,6-dimethoxymethyl-p-cresol)、2,6乙醯氧基甲基-對甲酚(2,6-diacethoxymethyl-p-cresol)等。By using a compound having these methylol groups, when a photosensitive composition is formed on an uneven substrate, the occurrence of cracks is further reduced. In addition, it is possible to have excellent pattern processability, and the 5% mass reduction temperature is 350°C or higher, more preferably 380°C or higher, and high heat resistance. Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (AM4) include 46DMOC, 46DMOEP (the above are product names, manufactured by ASAHI YUKIZAI CORPORATION), DML-MBPC, DML-MBOC, DML-OCHP, DML-PCHP, DML-PC, DML-PTBP, DML-34X, DML-EP, DML-POP, dimethylolBisOC-P, DML-PFP, DML-PSBP, DML-MTrisPC (the above are product names, manufactured by Honshu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), NIKALAC MX -290 (product name, manufactured by Sanwa Chemical Co., Ltd.), 2,6-dimethoxymethyl-4-t-buthylphenol (2,6-dimethoxymethyl-4-t-buthylphenol), 2, 6-dimethoxymethyl-p-cresol (2,6-dimethoxymethyl-p-cresol), 2,6 acetoxymethyl-p-cresol (2,6-diacethoxymethyl-p-cresol), etc.

又,作為由式(AM5)表示之化合物的具體例,可列舉TriML-P、TriML-35XL、TML-HQ、TML-BP、TML-pp-BPF、TML-BPA、TMOM-BP、HML-TPPHBA、HML-TPHAP、HMOM-TPPHBA、HMOM-TPHAP(以上為產品名,Honshu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.製)、TM-BIP-A(商品名,ASAHI YUKIZAI CORPORATION製)、NIKALAC MX-280、NIKALAC MX-270、NIKALAC MW-100LM(以上為產品名,Sanwa Chemical Co., Ltd.製)。Moreover, as specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (AM5), TriML-P, TriML-35XL, TML-HQ, TML-BP, TML-pp-BPF, TML-BPA, TMOM-BP, HML-TPPHBA , HML-TPHAP, HMOM-TPPHBA, HMOM-TPHAP (the above are product names, manufactured by Honshu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), TM-BIP-A (trade name, manufactured by ASAHI YUKIZAI CORPORATION), NIKALAC MX-280, NIKALAC MX-270, NIKALAC MW-100LM (the above are product names, manufactured by Sanwa Chemical Co., Ltd.).

(環氧化合物(具有環氧基之化合物)) 作為環氧化合物,於一分子中具有兩個以上的環氧基之化合物為較佳。環氧基於200℃以下進行交聯反應,且不會發生源自交聯之脱水反應,因此不會發生膜收縮。因此,若含有環氧化合物,則可有效地抑制組成物的低溫硬化及翹曲。(Epoxy compound (compound having epoxy group)) As the epoxy compound, a compound having two or more epoxy groups in one molecule is preferred. Epoxy is based on the cross-linking reaction at 200°C or less, and the dehydration reaction from cross-linking does not occur, so film shrinkage does not occur. Therefore, if the epoxy compound is contained, the low-temperature hardening and warpage of the composition can be effectively suppressed.

環氧化合物含有聚環氧乙烷基為較佳。藉此,能夠抑制彈性率進一步降低,並能夠抑制翹曲。又,能夠提高膜的柔軟性來得到伸長率等亦優異之硬化膜。聚環氧乙烷基是指環氧乙烷的重複單元數為2以上者,重複單元數係2~15為較佳。The epoxy compound preferably contains a polyethylene oxide group. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a further decrease in the modulus of elasticity and to suppress warpage. In addition, the flexibility of the film can be improved to obtain a cured film that is also excellent in elongation. The polyethylene oxide group means the number of repeating units of ethylene oxide of 2 or more, and the number of repeating units is preferably 2-15.

作為環氧化合物的例,可列舉雙酚A型環氧樹脂;雙酚F型環氧樹脂;丙二醇二縮水甘油醚等伸烷基二醇型環氧樹脂;聚丙二醇二縮水甘油醚等聚伸烷基二醇型環氧樹脂;聚甲基(縮水甘油醚氧基丙基)矽氧烷等含有環氧基的矽氧樹脂等,但並不限定於此。具體而言,可列舉Epiclon(註冊商標)850-S、Epiclon(註冊商標)HP-4032、Epiclon(註冊商標)HP-7200、Epiclon(註冊商標)HP-820、Epiclon(註冊商標)HP-4700、Epiclon(註冊商標)EXA-4710、Epiclon(註冊商標)HP-4770、Epiclon(註冊商標)EXA-859CRP、Epiclon(註冊商標)EXA-1514、Epiclon(註冊商標)EXA-4880、Epiclon (註冊商標)EXA-4850-150、Epiclon EXA-4850-1000、Epiclon(註冊商標)EXA-4816、Epiclon(註冊商標)EXA-4822(以上為產品名,DIC Corporation製)、Rikaresin(註冊商標)BE0-60E(產品名,Japan Chemical Co., Ltd.)、EP-4003S、 EP-4000S(ADEKA CORPORATION)等。其中,從抑制翹曲和耐熱性優異的觀點考慮,含有聚氧化乙烯基的環氧樹脂為較佳。例如,Epiclon(註冊商標)EXA-4880、Epiclon(註冊商標)EXA-4822、 Rikaresin (註冊商標)BE0-60E含有聚氧化乙烯基,因此為較佳。Examples of epoxy compounds include bisphenol A type epoxy resin; bisphenol F type epoxy resin; alkylene glycol type epoxy resins such as propylene glycol diglycidyl ether; and polypropylene glycol diglycidyl ether. Alkyl glycol type epoxy resin; epoxy resin containing epoxy groups such as polymethyl (glycidoxypropyl) silicone, etc., but not limited to this. Specifically, Epiclon (registered trademark) 850-S, Epiclon (registered trademark) HP-4032, Epiclon (registered trademark) HP-7200, Epiclon (registered trademark) HP-820, Epiclon (registered trademark) HP-4700 , Epiclon (registered trademark) EXA-4710, Epiclon (registered trademark) HP-4770, Epiclon (registered trademark) EXA-859CRP, Epiclon (registered trademark) EXA-1514, Epiclon (registered trademark) EXA-4880, Epiclon (registered trademark) ) EXA-4850-150, Epiclon EXA-4850-1000, Epiclon (registered trademark) EXA-4816, Epiclon (registered trademark) EXA-4822 (the above are product names, manufactured by DIC Corporation), Rikaresin (registered trademark) BE0-60E (Product name, Japan Chemical Co., Ltd.), EP-4003S, EP-4000S (ADEKA CORPORATION), etc. Among them, from the viewpoints of suppressing warpage and excellent heat resistance, epoxy resins containing polyoxyethylene groups are preferred. For example, Epiclon (registered trademark) EXA-4880, Epiclon (registered trademark) EXA-4822, and Rikaresin (registered trademark) BE0-60E contain polyoxyethylene groups and are therefore preferred.

環氧化合物相對於樹脂100質量份係5~50質量份為較佳,10~50質量份為更佳,10~40質量份為進一步較佳。配合量係5質量份以上而能夠進一步抑制硬化膜的翹曲,係50質量份以下而能夠進一步抑制因固化時的回流所導致之圖案埋入。The epoxy compound is preferably 5 to 50 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the resin, more preferably 10 to 50 parts by mass, and even more preferably 10 to 40 parts by mass. The compounding amount is 5 parts by mass or more to further suppress the warpage of the cured film, and 50 parts by mass or less can further suppress pattern embedding due to reflow during curing.

(氧雜環丁烷化合物(具有氧雜環丁基之化合物)) 作為氧雜環丁烷化合物,可列舉於一分子中具有兩個以上的氧雜環丁烷環之化合物、3-乙基-3-羥甲氧雜環丁烷、1,4-雙{[(3-乙基-3-氧雜環丁基)甲氧基]甲基}苯、3-乙基-3-(2-乙基己基)氧雜環丁烷,1,4-苯二羧酸-雙[(3-乙基-3-氧雜環丁基)甲基]酯等。作為具體例,能夠較佳地使用TOAGOSEI CO., LTD.製Aron Oxetane系列(例如,OXT-121、OXT-221、OXT-191、OXT-223),該些可以單獨使用,或者可以混合使用兩種以上。(Oxetane compound (compound with oxetanyl group)) Examples of the oxetane compound include compounds having two or more oxetane rings in one molecule, 3-ethyl -3-hydroxymethoxetane, 1,4-bis{[(3-ethyl-3-oxetanyl)methoxy]methyl}benzene, 3-ethyl-3-(2 -Ethylhexyl)oxetane, 1,4-benzenedicarboxylic acid-bis[(3-ethyl-3-oxetanyl)methyl]ester, etc. As a specific example, Aron Oxetane series manufactured by TOAGOSEI CO., LTD. (for example, OXT-121, OXT-221, OXT-191, OXT-223) can be preferably used, and these can be used alone or in combination. More than species.

相對於聚醯亞胺前驅物等100質量份,氧雜環丁烷化合物係5~50質量份為較佳,10~50質量份為更佳,10~40質量份為進一步較佳。The oxetane compound system is preferably 5-50 parts by mass, more preferably 10-50 parts by mass, and still more preferably 10-40 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of polyimide precursors and the like.

(苯并噁嗪化合物(具有苯并噁唑基之化合物)) 關於苯并噁嗪化合物,因源自開環加成反應之交聯反應而固化時不產生脫氣,進而減少熱收縮而抑制產生翹曲,因此為較佳。(Benzoxazine compounds (compounds with benzoxazole groups)) Regarding benzoxazine compounds, due to the cross-linking reaction derived from the ring-opening addition reaction, no outgassing occurs during curing, thereby reducing heat shrinkage and inhibiting Warpage occurs, so it is preferable.

作為苯并噁嗪化合物的較佳的例,可列舉B-a型苯并噁嗪、B-m型苯并噁嗪(以上為產品名,Shikoku Chemicals Corporation製)、多羥基苯乙烯樹脂的苯并噁嗪加成物、苯酚酚醛清漆型二氫苯并噁嗪化合物。該些可以單獨使用,或者可以混合使用兩種以上。As preferred examples of the benzoxazine compound, Ba-type benzoxazine, Bm-type benzoxazine (the product name above, manufactured by Shikoku Chemicals Corporation), and benzoxazine addition of polyhydroxystyrene resin can be cited. Product, phenol novolac type dihydrobenzoxazine compound. These can be used alone, or two or more of them can be mixed and used.

相對於樹脂100質量份,苯并噁嗪化合物係5~50質量份為較佳,10~50質量份為更佳,10~40質量份為進一步較佳。With respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin, the benzoxazine compound is preferably 5 to 50 parts by mass, more preferably 10 to 50 parts by mass, and more preferably 10 to 40 parts by mass.

<<<光聚合起始劑>>> 感光性樹脂組成物亦可以含有光聚合起始劑。尤其,藉由感光性樹脂組成物包含光自由基聚合起始劑,將感光性樹脂組成物應用於半導體晶圓等基板而形成感光性樹脂組成物層之後,照射光,藉此發生因自由基引起之硬化,並能夠降低光照射部中的溶解性。因此,例如具有如下優點,亦即經由具有僅遮蔽電極部之圖案之光遮罩對感光性樹脂組成物層進行曝光,藉此能夠依照電極圖案來輕鬆地製作溶解性不同之區域。<<<Photopolymerization initiator>>> The photosensitive resin composition may contain a photopolymerization initiator. In particular, since the photosensitive resin composition contains a photoradical polymerization initiator, the photosensitive resin composition is applied to a substrate such as a semiconductor wafer to form a photosensitive resin composition layer, and then light is irradiated to generate radicals. It causes hardening and can reduce the solubility in the light-irradiated part. Therefore, for example, there is an advantage that by exposing the photosensitive resin composition layer through a light mask having a pattern for shielding only the electrode portion, it is possible to easily create regions with different solubility in accordance with the electrode pattern.

作為光聚合起始劑,只要具有開始進行聚合性化合物的聚合反應(交聯反應)之能力,則並無特別限制,能夠從公知的光聚合起始劑中適當選擇。例如,從紫外線區域相對於可見區域的光線具有感光性者為較佳。又,可以係與光激發之増感劑產生一些作用,並生成活性自由基之活性劑。 光聚合起始劑至少含有一種於約300~800nm(較佳為330~500nm)的範圍內至少具有約50莫耳吸光係數之化合物為較佳。化合物的莫耳吸光係數能夠利用公知的方法來測定。具體而言,例如,藉由紫外可見分光光度計(Varian公司製Cary-5 spectrophotometer),並利用乙酸乙酯溶劑而於0.01g/L的濃度下進行測定為較佳。The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to start the polymerization reaction (crosslinking reaction) of the polymerizable compound, and it can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, it is preferable that the light from the ultraviolet region has sensitivity to the visible region. In addition, it can be an active agent that has some effects with light-excited sensitizers and generates active free radicals. The photopolymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having at least about 50 molar absorption coefficient in the range of about 300 to 800 nm (preferably 330 to 500 nm). The molar absorption coefficient of the compound can be measured by a known method. Specifically, for example, it is preferable to measure with an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian) using an ethyl acetate solvent at a concentration of 0.01 g/L.

作為光聚合起始劑,能夠任意使用公知的化合物,例如,可列舉鹵化烴衍生物(例如具有三嗪骨架者、具有噁二唑骨架者、具有三鹵甲基者等)、醯基氧化膦等醯基膦化合物、六芳基聯咪唑、肟衍生物等肟化合物、有機過氧化物、硫化合物、酮化合物、芳香族鎓鹽、酮肟醚、胺基苯乙酮化合物、羥基苯乙酮、偶氮系化合物、疊氮基化合物、茂金屬化合物、有機硼化合物、鐵芳烴錯合物等。As the photopolymerization initiator, a known compound can be used arbitrarily, for example, halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton, those having a trihalomethyl group, etc.), phosphine oxides Oxime compounds such as phosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole, oxime derivatives, organic peroxides, sulfur compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, hydroxyacetophenone , Azo compounds, azide compounds, metallocene compounds, organoboron compounds, iron arene complexes, etc.

作為具有三嗪骨架的鹵化烴化合物,例如可列舉:若林等著,“日本化學學會通報(Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan)”,42、2924(1969)中所記載之化合物,英國專利1388492號說明書中所記載之化合物,日本特開昭53-133428號公報中所記載之化合物,德國專利3337024號說明書中所記載之化合物,F.C.謝弗(F. C. Schaefer)等的“有機化學期刊(J. Org. Chem.)”,29、1527(1964)中所記載之化合物,日本特開昭62-58241號公報中所記載之化合物,日本特開平5-281728號公報中所記載之化合物,日本特開平5-34920號公報中所記載之化合物,美國專利第4212976號說明書中所記載之化合物等。Examples of halogenated hydrocarbon compounds having a triazine skeleton include compounds described in Wakabayashi et al., "Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan", 42, 2924 (1969), British Patent No. 1388492 The compound described in the specification, the compound described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 53-133428, the compound described in the specification of German Patent No. 3337024, FC Schaefer et al. "Journal of Organic Chemistry (J. Org) Chem.)", 29, 1527 (1964), the compound described in JP 62-58241, the compound described in JP 5-281728, JP H The compound described in 5-34920 gazette, the compound described in the specification of US Patent No. 4,212,976, etc.

作為美國專利第4212976號說明書中所記載之化合物,例如可列舉:具有噁二唑骨架的化合物(例如2-三氯甲基-5-苯基-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-(4-氯苯基)-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-(1-萘基)-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-(2-萘基)-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三溴甲基-5-苯基-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三溴甲基-5-(2-萘基)-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-苯乙烯基-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-(4-氯苯乙烯基)-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-(4-甲氧基苯乙烯基)-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-(4-正丁氧基苯乙烯基)-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三溴甲基-5-苯乙烯基-1,3,4-噁二唑等)等。As the compound described in the specification of U.S. Patent No. 4212976, for example, a compound having an oxadiazole skeleton (for example, 2-trichloromethyl-5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2- Trichloromethyl-5-(4-chlorophenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5-(1-naphthyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole , 2-Trichloromethyl-5-(2-naphthyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-tribromomethyl-5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2 -Tribromomethyl-5-(2-naphthyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5-styryl-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2- Trichloromethyl-5-(4-chlorostyryl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5-(4-methoxystyryl)-1,3, 4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5-(4-n-butoxystyryl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-tribromomethyl-5-styryl- 1,3,4-oxadiazole etc.) etc.

又,作為上述以外的光聚合起始劑,例示日本特開2015-087611號公報的0086段中所記載之化合物、日本特開昭53-133428號公報、日本特公昭57-1819號公報、日本特公昭57-6096號公報及美國專利第3615455號說明書中所記載之化合物等,並將該些內容編入本說明書中。In addition, examples of photopolymerization initiators other than those described above include compounds described in paragraph 0086 of Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-087611, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 53-133428, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 57-1819, and Japan The compounds described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 57-6096 and US Patent No. 3615455 are incorporated into this specification.

作為酮化合物,例如,例示日本特開2015-087611號公報的0087段中所記載之化合物,並將該內容編入本說明書中。 市售品中亦可較佳地使用KAYACURE DETX(Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.製)。As the ketone compound, for example, the compound described in paragraph 0087 of JP 2015-087611 A is exemplified, and the content is incorporated in this specification. KAYACURE DETX (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) can also be preferably used among commercially available products.

作為光聚合起始劑,還能夠較佳地使用羥基苯乙酮化合物、胺基苯乙酮化合物及醯基膦化合物。更具體而言,例如,還能夠使用日本特開平10-291969號公報中所記載之胺基苯乙酮系起始劑、日本專利第4225898號中所記載之醯基氧化膦系起始劑。 作為羥基苯乙酮系起始劑,能夠使用IRGACURE-184(IRGACURE為註冊商標)、DAROCUR-1173、IRGACURE-500、IRGACURE-2959、IRGACURE-127(產品名:均為BASF公司製)。 作為胺基苯乙酮系起始劑,能夠使用作為市售品之IRGACURE-907、IRGACURE-369及IRGACURE-379(產品名:均為BASF公司製)。 作為胺基苯乙酮系起始劑,還能夠使用極大吸收波長與365nm或405nm等波長匹配之日本特開2009-191179號公報中所記載之化合物。 作為醯基膦系起始劑,可列舉2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基-二苯基-膦氧化物等。又,能夠使用作為市售品之IRGACURE-819或IRGACURE-TPO(產品名:均為BASF公司製)。 作為茂金屬化合物,例示IRGACURE-784(BASF公司製)等。As the photopolymerization initiator, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, aminoacetophenone compounds, and phosphine compounds can also be preferably used. More specifically, for example, the aminoacetophenone-based initiator described in JP-A No. 10-291969 and the phosphine oxide-based initiator described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 can also be used. As the hydroxyacetophenone-based initiator, IRGACURE-184 (IRGACURE is a registered trademark), DAROCUR-1173, IRGACURE-500, IRGACURE-2959, and IRGACURE-127 (product names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used. As the aminoacetophenone-based initiator, IRGACURE-907, IRGACURE-369, and IRGACURE-379 (product names: all manufactured by BASF Corporation) that are commercially available products can be used. As the aminoacetophenone-based initiator, it is also possible to use compounds described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-191179 whose maximum absorption wavelength matches the wavelength of 365 nm or 405 nm. Examples of the phosphine-based initiator include 2,4,6-trimethylbenzyl-diphenyl-phosphine oxide. In addition, IRGACURE-819 or IRGACURE-TPO (product name: both manufactured by BASF Corporation), which are commercially available products, can be used. As a metallocene compound, IRGACURE-784 (made by BASF Corporation) etc. are illustrated.

作為光聚合起始劑,更佳為列舉肟化合物。藉由使用肟化合物,能夠進一步有效地提高曝光寬容度。肟酯系化合物中,曝光寬容度(曝光餘量)較廣,且還作為熱鹼產生劑而發揮功能,因此為特佳。 作為肟化合物的具體例,能夠使用日本特開2001-233842號公報中所記載之化合物、日本特開2000-80068號公報中所記載之化合物、日本特開2006-342166號公報中所記載之化合物。 作為較佳的肟化合物,例如可列舉下述結構的化合物、3-苯甲醯氧基亞胺基丁烷-2-酮、3-乙醯氧基亞胺基丁烷-2-酮、3-丙醯氧基亞胺基丁烷-2-酮、2-乙醯氧基亞胺基戊烷-3-酮、2-乙醯氧基亞胺基-1-苯基丙烷-1-酮、2-苯甲醯氧基亞胺基-1-苯基丙烷-1-酮、3-(4-甲苯磺醯氧基)亞胺基丁烷-2-酮、以及2-乙氧基羰氧基亞胺基-1-苯基丙烷-1-酮等。 [化學式36]

Figure 02_image071
As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound is more preferred. By using oxime compounds, exposure latitude can be further effectively improved. Among the oxime ester-based compounds, the exposure latitude (exposure margin) is relatively wide, and it also functions as a thermal base generator, so it is particularly preferred. As specific examples of the oxime compound, the compounds described in JP 2001-233842, the compounds described in JP 2000-80068, and the compounds described in JP 2006-342166 can be used. . As a preferable oxime compound, for example, a compound having the following structure, 3-benzyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, 3 -Propionyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentane-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one , 2-benzyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-(4-toluenesulfonyloxy)iminobutan-2-one, and 2-ethoxycarbonyl Oxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, etc. [Chemical formula 36]
Figure 02_image071

作為肟化合物,可列舉J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年)p p.1653-1660、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年)pp.156-162、Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology(1995年)pp.202-232的各文獻中所記載之化合物、日本特開2000-66385號公報中所記載之化合物、日本特開2000-80068號公報、日本特表2004-534797號公報、日本特開2006-342166號公報、國際公開WO2015/036910號公報的各公報中所記載之化合物等。 市售品中,還可較佳地使用IRGACURE OXE 01、IRGACURE OXE 02、IRGACURE OXE 03、IRGACURE OXE 04(以上為BASF公司製)、ADEKA OPTOMER N-1919(ADEKA CORPORATION製、日本特開2012-14052號公報中所記載之光聚合起始劑2)。又,能夠使用TR-PBG-304(常州強力電子新材料有限公司製)、ADEKA ARKLS NCI-831及ADEKA ARKLS NCI-930(ADEKACorporation製)。又,還能能使用DFI-091(DAITO CHEMIX Co., Ltd.製)。Examples of oxime compounds include JCS Perkin II (1979) p p.1653-1660, JCS Perkin II (1979) pp.156-162, Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995) pp.202-232. Compounds described in the literature, compounds described in JP 2000-66385, JP 2000-80068, JP 2004-534797, JP 2006-342166, International Publication Compounds and the like described in each publication of WO2015/036910. Among the commercially available products, IRGACURE OXE 01, IRGACURE OXE 02, IRGACURE OXE 03, IRGACURE OXE 04 (the above are made by BASF), ADEKA OPTOMER N-1919 (made by ADEKA CORPORATION, JP 2012-14052) The photopolymerization initiator described in the No. 2). In addition, TR-PBG-304 (manufactured by Changzhou Qiangli Electronic New Material Co., Ltd.), ADEKA ARKLS NCI-831 and ADEKA ARKLS NCI-930 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) can be used. In addition, DFI-091 (manufactured by DAITO CHEMIX Co., Ltd.) can also be used.

又,可以使用於咔唑環的N位連結有肟之日本特表2009-519904號公報中所記載之化合物、於二苯甲酮部位導入有雜取代基之美國專利7626957號公報中所記載之化合物、於色素部位導入有硝基之日本特開2010-15025號公報及美國專利公開2009-292039號公報中所記載之化合物、國際公開WO2009-131189號中所記載之酮肟化合物、於分子內包含三嗪骨架和肟骨架之美國專利7556910號公報中所記載之化合物、於405nm具有最大吸收且相對於g射線光源具有良好的感度之日本特開2009-221114號公報中所記載之化合物等。 又,亦以能夠較佳地使用日本特開2007-231000號公報及日本特開2007-322744號公報中所記載之環狀肟化合物。從具有較高的光吸收性且高感度化的觀點考慮,於環狀肟化合物中,尤其日本特開2010-32985號公報、日本特開2010-185072號公報中所記載之縮合於咔唑色素之環狀肟化合物亦為較佳。 又,還能夠較佳地使用作為於肟化合物的特定部位具有不飽和鍵之化合物之日本特開2009-242469號公報中所記載之化合物。 進而,又,還能夠使用具有氟原子之肟化合物。作為該種肟化合物的具體例,可列舉日本特開2010-262028號公報中所記載之化合物、日本特表2014-500852號公報的0345段中所記載之化合物24、36~40、日本特開2013-164471號公報的0101段中所記載之化合物(C-3)等。 作為最佳之肟化合物,可列舉日本特開2007-269779號公報中所示出之具有特定取代基之肟化合物、日本特開2009-191061號公報中所示出之具有硫芳基之肟化合物等。In addition, it is possible to use the compound described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2009-519904 in which an oxime is linked to the N position of the carbazole ring, and the compound described in U.S. Patent No. 7626957 in which a heterosubstituent is introduced at the benzophenone site The compound, the compound described in JP 2010-15025 A and U.S. Patent Publication No. 2009-292039, the ketoxime compound described in International Publication WO2009-131189, in which the nitro group is introduced into the pigment site, in the molecule The compound described in U.S. Patent No. 7556910 containing a triazine skeleton and an oxime skeleton, the compound described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-221114, etc. having a maximum absorption at 405 nm and having good sensitivity to a g-ray light source. In addition, the cyclic oxime compounds described in JP 2007-231000 A and JP 2007-322744 A can be preferably used. From the viewpoint of high light absorption and high sensitivity, among the cyclic oxime compounds, in particular, the condensed carbazole dyes described in JP 2010-32985 A and 2010-185072 The cyclic oxime compound is also preferred. In addition, the compound described in JP 2009-242469 A, which is a compound having an unsaturated bond at a specific site of the oxime compound, can also be preferably used. Furthermore, an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used. Specific examples of such oxime compounds include the compounds described in JP 2010-262028 A, the compounds 24, 36-40, and the compounds described in paragraph 0345 of JP 2014-500852 A. The compound (C-3) and the like described in paragraph 0101 of the 2013-164471 Bulletin. As the best oxime compound, oxime compounds having specific substituents shown in JP 2007-269779 A, and oxime compounds having a sulfur aryl group shown in JP 2009-191061 Wait.

從曝光感度的觀點考慮,光聚合起始劑係選自包括由三鹵甲基三嗪化合物、苄基二甲基縮酮化合物、α-羥基酮化合物、α-胺基酮化合物、醯基膦化合物、氧化膦化合物、茂金屬化合物、肟化合物、三烯丙基咪唑二聚體、鎓鹽化合物、苯并噻唑化合物、二苯甲酮化合物、苯乙酮化合物及其衍生物、環戊二烯-苯-鐵錯合物及其鹽、鹵甲基噁二唑化合物、3-芳基取代香豆素化合物之組中之化合物。 更佳的光聚合起始劑係選自包括三鹵甲基三嗪化合物、α-胺基酮化合物、醯基膦化合物、氧化膦化合物、茂金屬化合物、肟化合物、三芳基咪唑二聚體、鎓鹽化合物、二苯甲酮化合物、苯乙酮化合物,特佳為選自由三鹵甲基三嗪化合物、α-胺基酮化合物、肟化合物、三芳基咪唑二聚體、二苯甲酮化合物之組中之至少一種化合物為進一步較佳,使用茂金屬化合物或肟化合物為進一步較佳,肟化合物為特佳。 又,光聚合起始劑還能夠使用二苯甲酮、N,N’-四甲基-4,4’-二胺基二苯甲酮(米氏酮)等N,N’-四烷基-4,4’-二胺基二苯甲酮,2-苄基-2-二甲基胺基-1-(4-嗎啉基苯基)-丁酮-1、2-甲基-1-[4-(甲硫基)苯基]-2-嗎啉基-丙酮-1等芳香族酮、烷基蒽醌等與芳香環進行縮環而成的醌類、安息香烷基醚等安息香醚化合物、安息香、烷基安息香等安息香化合物、苄基二甲基縮酮等苄基衍生物等。 又,還能夠使用由下述式(I)表示之化合物。 [化學式37]

Figure 02_image073
式(I)中,R50 係碳數1~20的烷基;因1個以上的氧原子而中斷之碳數2~20的烷基;碳數1~12的烷氧基;苯基;由碳數1~20的烷基、碳數1~12的烷氧基、鹵素原子、環戊基、環己基、碳數1~12的烯基、因1個以上的氧原子而中斷之碳數2~18的烷基及碳數1~4的烷基中的至少一個取代之苯基或聯苯基,R51 係由式(II)表示之基團,或者係與R50 相同的基團,R52 ~R54 各自獨立地係碳數1~12的烷基、碳數1~12的烷氧基或鹵素。 [化學式38]
Figure 02_image075
式中,R55 ~R57 與上述式(I)的R52 ~R54 相同。From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, the photopolymerization initiator is selected from the group consisting of trihalomethyl triazine compounds, benzyl dimethyl ketal compounds, α-hydroxy ketone compounds, α-amino ketone compounds, and phosphines. Compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimers, onium salt compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds and their derivatives, cyclopentadiene -Benzene-iron complexes and their salts, halomethyl oxadiazole compounds, and 3-aryl substituted coumarin compounds. More preferred photopolymerization initiators are selected from the group consisting of trihalomethyl triazine compounds, α-amino ketone compounds, phosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triaryl imidazole dimers, Onium salt compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds, particularly preferably selected from trihalomethyl triazine compounds, α-amino ketone compounds, oxime compounds, triaryl imidazole dimers, and benzophenone compounds At least one compound in the group is further preferred, metallocene compounds or oxime compounds are further preferred, and oxime compounds are particularly preferred. In addition, the photopolymerization initiator can also use N,N'-tetraalkyl groups such as benzophenone and N,N'-tetramethyl-4,4'-diaminobenzophenone (Michler’s ketone). -4,4'-Diaminobenzophenone, 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1-(4-morpholinylphenyl)-butanone-1, 2-methyl-1 -[4-(Methylthio)phenyl]-2-morpholinyl-acetone-1 and other aromatic ketones, alkylanthraquinones and other quinones condensed with aromatic rings, benzoin such as benzoin alkyl ether Benzoin compounds such as ether compounds, benzoin and alkylbenzoin, benzyl derivatives such as benzyl dimethyl ketal, etc. In addition, a compound represented by the following formula (I) can also be used. [Chemical formula 37]
Figure 02_image073
In formula (I), R 50 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms; an alkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms interrupted by more than one oxygen atom; an alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms; a phenyl group; Alkyl with 1 to 20 carbons, alkoxy with 1 to 12 carbons, halogen atom, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, alkenyl with 1 to 12 carbons, carbon interrupted by more than one oxygen atom A phenyl group or biphenyl group substituted with at least one of an alkyl group having 2 to 18 and an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbons, R 51 is a group represented by formula (II), or the same group as R 50 Groups, R 52 to R 54 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbons, an alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbons, or halogen. [Chemical formula 38]
Figure 02_image075
In the formula, R 55 to R 57 are the same as R 52 to R 54 in the above formula (I).

又,光聚合起始劑還能夠使用國際公開WO2015/125469號的0048~0055段中所記載之化合物。In addition, the photopolymerization initiator can also use the compound described in paragraphs 0048 to 0055 of International Publication WO2015/125469.

當感光性樹脂組成物包含光聚合起始劑時,光聚合起始劑的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分係0.1~30質量%為較佳,更佳為0.1~20質量%,進一步較佳為0.1~10質量%。 光聚合起始劑可以僅使用一種,亦可以使用兩種以上。當光聚合起始劑係兩種以上時,其合計為上述範圍為較佳。When the photosensitive resin composition contains a photopolymerization initiator, the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.1-30% by mass relative to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition, and more preferably 0.1-20% by mass , More preferably, it is 0.1-10 mass %. Only one type of photopolymerization initiator may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types of photopolymerization initiators are used, the total amount is preferably in the above range.

<<<遷移抑制劑>>> 感光性樹脂組成物還包含遷移抑制劑為較佳。藉由包含遷移抑制劑,能夠有效地抑制源自金屬層(金屬配線)之金屬離子轉移到感光性樹脂組成物層內。 作為遷移抑制劑,並無特別限制,可列舉具有雜環(吡咯環、呋喃環、噻吩環、咪唑環、噁唑環、噻唑環、吡唑環、異噁唑環、異噻唑環、四唑環、吡啶環、噠嗪環、嘧啶環、吡嗪環、哌啶環、哌嗪環、嗎啉環、2H-吡喃環及6H-吡喃環、三嗪環等。)之化合物、具有硫脲類及巰基之化合物、受阻酚系化合物、水楊酸衍生物系化合物、醯肼基衍生物系化合物。尤其,能夠較佳地使用三唑、苯并三唑等三唑系化合物、四唑、苯并四唑等四唑系化合物。<<<Migration inhibitor>>> It is preferable that the photosensitive resin composition further contains a migration inhibitor. By including the migration inhibitor, it is possible to effectively suppress the transfer of metal ions originating from the metal layer (metal wiring) into the photosensitive resin composition layer. The migration inhibitor is not particularly limited, and examples include heterocyclic rings (pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrazole ring, isoxazole ring, isothiazole ring, tetrazole ring). Ring, pyridine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperidine ring, piperazine ring, morpholine ring, 2H-pyran ring, 6H-pyran ring, triazine ring, etc.). Thioureas and mercapto compounds, hindered phenol compounds, salicylic acid derivative compounds, and hydrazino derivative compounds. In particular, triazole-based compounds such as triazole and benzotriazole, and tetrazole-based compounds such as tetrazole and benzotetrazole can be preferably used.

又,亦能夠使用捕捉鹵素離子等陰離子之離子捕捉劑。In addition, ion scavengers that trap anions such as halogen ions can also be used.

作為其他遷移抑制劑,能夠使用日本特開2013-15701號公報的0094段中所記載之防錆劑、日本特開2009-283711號公報的0073~0076段中所記載之化合物、日本特開2011-59656號公報的0052段中所記載之化合物、日本特開2012-194520號公報的0114、0116段及0118段中所記載之化合物等。As other migration inhibitors, the antiseptic agents described in paragraph 0094 of JP 2013-15701 A, the compounds described in paragraphs 0073 to 0076 of JP 2009-283711, and JP 2011 can be used. The compound described in paragraph 0052 of -59656, the compound described in paragraph 0114, paragraph 0116, and paragraph 0118 of JP 2012-194520, etc.

作為遷移抑制劑的具體例,能夠列舉1H-1,2,3-三唑、1H-四唑。Specific examples of migration inhibitors include 1H-1,2,3-triazole and 1H-tetrazole.

當感光性樹脂組成物具有遷移抑制劑時,遷移抑制劑的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分,係0.01~5.0質量%為較佳,0.05~2.0質量%為更佳,0.1~1.0質量%為進一步較佳。 遷移抑制劑可以僅為一種,亦可以為兩種以上。當遷移抑制劑為兩種以上時,其合計為上述範圍為較佳。When the photosensitive resin composition has a migration inhibitor, the content of the migration inhibitor relative to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 0.01 to 5.0 mass%, more preferably 0.05 to 2.0 mass%, and 0.1 to 1.0% by mass is more preferable. There may be only one type of migration inhibitor, or two or more types. When there are two or more migration inhibitors, it is preferable that the total of them is in the above range.

<<<聚合抑制劑>>> 本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物包含聚合抑制劑為較佳。 作為聚合抑制劑,例如可較佳地使用對苯二酚、對甲氧基苯酚、二-第三丁基-對甲酚、鄰苯三酚、對-第三丁基鄰苯二酚、對苯醌、二苯基-對苯醌、4,4’-硫代雙(3-甲基-6-第三丁基苯酚)、2,2’-亞甲基雙(4-甲基-6-第三丁基苯酚)、N-亞硝基-N-苯基羥基胺鋁鹽、吩噻嗪、N-亞苯基二苯胺、N-苯基萘胺、伸乙基二胺四乙酸、1,2-環己二胺四乙酸、乙二醇醚二胺四乙酸、2,6-二-第三丁基-4-甲基苯酚、5-亞硝基-8-羥基喹啉、1-亞硝基-2-萘酚、2-亞硝基-1-萘酚、2-亞硝基-5-(N-乙基-N-磺基丙基胺)苯酚、N-亞硝基-N-(1-萘基)羥胺銨鹽、雙(4-羥基-3,5-第三丁基)苯基甲烷等。又,亦能夠使用日本特開2015-127817號公報的0060段中所記載之聚合抑制劑及國際公開WO2015/125469號的0031~0046段中所記載之化合物。 當組成物具有聚合抑制劑時,聚合抑制劑的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分係0.01~5質量%為較佳。 聚合抑制劑可以僅為一種,亦可以為兩種以上。當聚合抑制劑為兩種以上時,其合計為上述範圍為較佳。<<<Polymerization inhibitor>>> The photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment preferably contains a polymerization inhibitor. As the polymerization inhibitor, for example, hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tertiary butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, p-tert-butylcatechol, p- Benzoquinone, diphenyl-p-benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis(3-methyl-6-tertiary butylphenol), 2,2'-methylenebis(4-methyl-6 -Tertiary butyl phenol), N-nitroso-N-phenylhydroxylamine aluminum salt, phenothiazine, N-phenylenediphenylamine, N-phenylnaphthylamine, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, 1,2-Cyclohexanediaminetetraacetic acid, glycol ether diaminetetraacetic acid, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol, 5-nitroso-8-hydroxyquinoline, 1 -Nitroso-2-naphthol, 2-nitroso-1-naphthol, 2-nitroso-5-(N-ethyl-N-sulfopropylamine)phenol, N-nitroso -N-(1-naphthyl)hydroxylamine ammonium salt, bis(4-hydroxy-3,5-tertiarybutyl)phenylmethane, etc. In addition, the polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0060 of JP 2015-127817 A and the compound described in paragraphs 0031 to 0046 of International Publication WO2015/125469 can also be used. When the composition has a polymerization inhibitor, the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass relative to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition. The polymerization inhibitor may be only one type or two or more types. When there are two or more kinds of polymerization inhibitors, it is preferable that the sum total is the above range.

<<<熱鹼產生劑>>> 本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物可以包含熱鹼產生劑。 作為熱鹼產生劑,其種類等並無特別限定,包含熱鹼產生劑為較佳,該熱鹼產生劑包含選自產生加熱至40℃以上之鹼之酸性化合物及具有pKa1為0~4的陰離子和銨陽離子之銨鹽中之至少一種。其中,pKa1表示酸的第一質子的解離常數(Ka)的對數(-Log10 Ka),詳細內容將後述。 藉由對該種化合物進行配合,能夠於低溫下進行聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等的環化反應,並且能夠得到穩定性更加優異之組成物。又,關於熱鹼產生劑,只要不加熱則不產生鹼,因此即使與聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等同時存在,亦能夠抑制保存中的聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等的環化,從而保存穩定性更加優異。<<<Thermal alkali generator>>> The photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment may contain a thermal alkali generator. The type of the thermal base generator is not particularly limited, and it is preferable to include a thermal base generator. The thermal base generator includes an acidic compound selected from the group that generates a base heated to 40°C or higher and those having a pKa1 of 0-4 At least one of ammonium salt of anion and ammonium cation. Here, pKa1 represents the logarithm (-Log 10 Ka) of the dissociation constant (Ka) of the first proton of the acid, and the details will be described later. By blending these compounds, the cyclization reaction of the polyimide precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor can be performed at low temperature, and a composition with more excellent stability can be obtained. In addition, the thermal alkali generator does not generate alkali as long as it is not heated. Therefore, even if it coexists with polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors, it can suppress the polyimide precursors and polyimide precursors during storage. The cyclization of polybenzoxazole precursors, etc., makes storage stability more excellent.

熱鹼產生劑包含選自加熱至40℃以上時產生鹼之酸性化合物(A1)及具有pKa1為0~4的陰離子和銨陽離子之銨鹽(A2)之至少一種為較佳。 關於上述酸性化合物(A1)及上述銨鹽(A2),若加熱則產生鹼,因此藉由由該些化合物產生之鹼,能夠促進聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等的環化反應,並能夠與低溫下進行聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等的環化。又,關於該些化合物,即使與藉由鹼而環化並硬化之聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等同時存在,只要不加熱則幾乎不進行聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等的環化,因此能夠製備包含穩定性優異之聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等之感光性樹脂組成物。 此外,本說明書中,酸性化合物是指利用pH(power of hydrogen)計將如下溶液於20℃下進行測定而得到之值小於7之化合物,該溶液係將1g化合物提取到容器,添加50ml的離子交換水與四氫呋喃的混合液(質量比為水/四氫呋喃=1/4),於室溫下攪拌1小時而得到。The thermal base generator preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of acidic compounds (A1) that generate bases when heated to 40°C or higher, and ammonium salts (A2) of anions with pKa1 of 0-4 and ammonium cations (A2). Regarding the acidic compound (A1) and the ammonium salt (A2), when heated, an alkali is generated. Therefore, the alkali generated by these compounds can promote the improvement of polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors. Cyclization reaction, and can perform cyclization of polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors at low temperature. In addition, with regard to these compounds, even if they coexist with polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors that are cyclized and hardened by an alkali, the polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors are hardly performed as long as they are not heated. Cyclization of polybenzoxazole precursors, etc., makes it possible to prepare photosensitive resin compositions containing polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors with excellent stability. In addition, in this specification, an acidic compound refers to a compound whose value is less than 7 by measuring the following solution at 20°C with a pH (power of hydrogen) meter. The solution is to extract 1g of the compound into a container and add 50ml of ions The mixed solution of exchange water and tetrahydrofuran (mass ratio of water/tetrahydrofuran=1/4) is obtained by stirring at room temperature for 1 hour.

本實施方式中,酸性化合物(A1)及銨鹽(A2)的鹼產生溫度係40℃以上為較佳,120~200℃為更佳。鹼產生溫度的上限係190℃以下為較佳,180℃以下為更佳,165℃以下為進一步較佳。鹼產生溫度的下限係130℃以上為較佳,135℃以上為更佳。 酸性化合物(A1)及銨鹽(A2)的鹼產生溫度只要是120℃以上,則於保存中不易產生鹼,因此能夠製備包含穩定性優異之聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等之感光性樹脂組成物。酸性化合物(A1)及銨鹽(A2)的鹼產生溫度只要是200℃以下,則能夠降低聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等的環化溫度。關於鹼產生溫度,例如,能夠利用差示掃描量熱測定,將化合物於耐壓膠囊中以5℃/分鐘加熱至250℃,讀取溫度最低的發熱峰值的峰值溫度,並將峰值溫度作為鹼產生溫度來進行測定。In this embodiment, the alkali generation temperature of the acidic compound (A1) and the ammonium salt (A2) is preferably 40°C or higher, and more preferably 120 to 200°C. The upper limit of the alkali generation temperature is preferably 190°C or lower, more preferably 180°C or lower, and even more preferably 165°C or lower. The lower limit of the alkali generation temperature is preferably 130°C or higher, and more preferably 135°C or higher. As long as the alkali generation temperature of the acidic compound (A1) and ammonium salt (A2) is 120°C or higher, it is not easy to generate alkali during storage. Therefore, it is possible to prepare polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors with excellent stability Photosensitive resin composition such as objects. As long as the alkali generation temperature of the acidic compound (A1) and the ammonium salt (A2) is 200° C. or lower, the cyclization temperature of the polyimide precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor can be lowered. Regarding the alkali generation temperature, for example, differential scanning calorimetry can be used to heat the compound in a pressure-resistant capsule at 5°C/min to 250°C, read the peak temperature of the lowest heat generation peak, and use the peak temperature as the alkali Generate temperature for measurement.

本實施方式中,藉由熱鹼產生劑產生之鹼係2級胺或3級胺為較佳,3級胺為更佳。3級胺的鹼性較高,因此能夠進一步降低聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等的環化溫度。又,藉由熱鹼產生劑產生之鹼的沸點係80℃以上為較佳,100℃以上為更佳,140℃以上為進一步較佳。又,產生鹼之分子量係80~2000為較佳。下限係100以上為更佳。上限係500以下為更佳。此外,分子量的值係由結構式求出之理論值。In this embodiment, alkali-based secondary amines or tertiary amines produced by thermal alkali generators are preferred, and tertiary amines are more preferred. The tertiary amine has high basicity, so it can further reduce the cyclization temperature of the polyimine precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor. In addition, the boiling point of the alkali produced by the thermal alkali generator is preferably 80°C or higher, more preferably 100°C or higher, and more preferably 140°C or higher. In addition, the molecular weight of the base generating base is preferably 80 to 2,000. More preferably, the lower limit is 100 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 500 or less. In addition, the value of the molecular weight is the theoretical value obtained from the structural formula.

本實施方式中,上述酸性化合物(A1)包含選自銨鹽及後述之由式(101)或(102)表示之化合物中之一種以上為較佳。In this embodiment, the acidic compound (A1) preferably contains one or more selected from the group consisting of ammonium salts and compounds represented by formula (101) or (102) described later.

本實施方式中,上述銨鹽(A2)係酸性化合物為較佳。此外,上述銨鹽(A2)可以係包含加熱至40℃以上(較佳為120~200℃)時產生鹼之酸性化合物之化合物,亦可以係除了加熱至40℃以上(較佳為120~200℃)時產生鹼之酸性化合物以外的化合物。In this embodiment, the above-mentioned ammonium salt (A2)-based acidic compound is preferable. In addition, the above-mentioned ammonium salt (A2) may be a compound containing an acidic compound that generates a base when heated to 40°C or higher (preferably 120-200°C), or may be a compound other than heating to 40°C or higher (preferably 120-200°C). ℃) when it produces alkali compounds other than acidic compounds.

本實施方式中,銨鹽是指由下述式(101)或式(102)表示之銨陽離子與陰離子的鹽。陰離子可以藉由共價鍵與銨陽離子的任意一部分鍵結,亦可以於銨陽離子的分子外具有,但於銨陽離子的分子外具有為較佳。此外,陰離子於銨陽離子的分子外具有是指銨陽離子與陰離子並不藉由共價鍵而鍵結之情況。以下,還將陽離子部的分子外的陰離子稱為陰離子。 式(101) 式(102) [化學式39]

Figure 02_image077
式(101)及式(102)中,R1 ~R6 分別獨立地表示氫原子或烴基,R7 表示烴基。式(101)及式(102)中的R1 與R2 、R3 與R4 、R5 與R6 、R5 與R7 可以分別鍵結而形成環。In this embodiment, the ammonium salt means a salt of an ammonium cation and an anion represented by the following formula (101) or (102). The anion may be bonded to any part of the ammonium cation by a covalent bond, or it may be present outside the molecule of the ammonium cation, but it is preferred to have it outside the molecule of the ammonium cation. In addition, the presence of the anion outside the molecule of the ammonium cation means that the ammonium cation and the anion are not bonded by a covalent bond. Hereinafter, the anion outside the molecule of the cation part is also referred to as an anion. Formula (101) Formula (102) [Chemical formula 39]
Figure 02_image077
In formula (101) and formula (102), R 1 to R 6 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, and R 7 represents a hydrocarbon group. R 1 and R 2 , R 3 and R 4 , R 5 and R 6 , and R 5 and R 7 in formula (101) and formula (102) may be respectively bonded to form a ring.

銨陽離子由下述式(Y1-1)~(Y1-5)中的任一個表示為較佳。 [化學式40]

Figure 02_image079
The ammonium cation is preferably represented by any one of the following formulas (Y1-1) to (Y1-5). [Chemical formula 40]
Figure 02_image079

式(Y1-1)~(Y1-5)中,R101 表示n價有機基團,R1 及R7 與式(101)或式(102)的定義相同。 式(Y1-1)~(Y1-5)中,Ar101 及Ar102 分別獨立地表示芳基,n表示1以上的整數,m表示0~5的整數。In formulas (Y1-1) to (Y1-5), R 101 represents an n-valent organic group, and R 1 and R 7 have the same definitions as in formula (101) or formula (102). In formulas (Y1-1) to (Y1-5), Ar 101 and Ar 102 each independently represent an aryl group, n represents an integer of 1 or more, and m represents an integer of 0-5.

本實施方式中,銨鹽具有pKa1為0~4的陰離子和銨陽離子為較佳。陰離子的pKa1的上限係3.5以下為更佳,3.2以下為進一步較佳。下限係0.5以上為較佳,1.0以上為更佳。陰離子的pKa1只要是上述範圍,則能夠於低溫下將聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等環化,進而,能夠提高包含聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等之感光性樹脂組成物的穩定性。pKa1只要是4以下,則熱鹼產生劑的穩定性良好,且於不進行加熱之情況下抑制產生鹼,且包含聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等之感光性樹脂組成物的穩定性為良好。pKa1只要是0以上,則所產生之鹼不易被中和,聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等的環化效率為良好。 陰離子的種類係選自羧酸陰離子、苯酚陰離子、磷酸陰離子及硫酸陰離子中之一種為較佳,從可兼顧鹽的穩定性和熱分解性的原因考慮,羧酸陰離子為更佳。亦即,銨鹽係銨陽離子與羧酸陰離子的鹽為更佳。 羧酸陰離子係具有2個以上的羧基之2價以上的羧酸的陰離子為較佳,2價羧酸的陰離子為更佳。依該態樣,能夠設為能夠進一步提高包含聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等之感光性樹脂組成物的穩定性、硬化性及顯影性之熱鹼產生劑。尤其,藉由使用2價羧酸的陰離子,能夠進一步提高包含聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等之感光性樹脂組成物的穩定性、硬化性及顯影性。 本實施方式中,羧酸陰離子係pKa1為4以下的羧酸的陰離子為較佳。pKa1係3.5以下為更佳,3.2以下為進一步較佳。依該態樣,能夠進一步提高包含聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等之感光性樹脂組成物的穩定性。 於此,pKa1表示酸的第一質子的解離常數的倒數的對數,並能夠參閱Determination of Organic Structures by Physical Methods(作者:Brown, H. C., McDaniel, D. H., Hafliger, O., Nachod, F. C.;編纂:Braude, E. A., Nachod, F. C.; Academic Press, New York, 1955)、Data for Biochemical Research(作者:Dawson, R.M.C.et al; Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1959)中所記載之值。關於未記載於該些文獻中之化合物,使用利用ACD/pKa(ACD/Labs製)的軟件並藉由結構式計算出之值。In this embodiment, it is preferable that the ammonium salt has an anion having a pKa1 of 0-4 and an ammonium cation. The upper limit of the pKa1 of the anion is more preferably 3.5 or less, and more preferably 3.2 or less. The lower limit is preferably 0.5 or more, and more preferably 1.0 or more. As long as the pKa1 of the anion is in the above range, it is possible to cyclize polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors at low temperatures, and furthermore, it is possible to increase the inclusion of polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors. Stability of photosensitive resin compositions such as materials. As long as pKa1 is 4 or less, the stability of the thermal alkali generator is good, and the generation of alkali is suppressed without heating, and a photosensitive resin composition containing polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors, etc. The stability of the material is good. As long as pKa1 is 0 or more, the generated alkali is not easily neutralized, and the cyclization efficiency of the polyimide precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor is good. The type of anion is preferably one selected from the group consisting of carboxylic acid anion, phenol anion, phosphoric acid anion, and sulfuric acid anion, and carboxylic acid anion is more preferable from the viewpoint of compatibility of salt stability and thermal decomposition. That is, a salt of an ammonium cation and a carboxylic anion is more preferable. The carboxylic acid anion is preferably an anion of a divalent or more carboxylic acid having two or more carboxyl groups, and more preferably an anion of a divalent carboxylic acid. According to this aspect, it can be used as a thermal alkali generator that can further improve the stability, curability, and developability of a photosensitive resin composition including a polyimide precursor and a polybenzoxazole precursor. In particular, by using an anion of a divalent carboxylic acid, it is possible to further improve the stability, curability, and developability of a photosensitive resin composition including a polyimide precursor and a polybenzoxazole precursor. In this embodiment, the anion of the carboxylic acid whose pKa1 of the carboxylic acid anion system is 4 or less is preferable. The pKa1 is more preferably 3.5 or less, and more preferably 3.2 or less. According to this aspect, the stability of the photosensitive resin composition including the polyimide precursor, the polybenzoxazole precursor, and the like can be further improved. Thereto, and pKa1 of the solution represents a first proton acid dissociation constant of the reciprocal, and can see the Determination of Organic Structures by Physical Methods (OF: Brown, HC, McDaniel, DH, Hafliger, O., Nachod, FC; codification: Braude, EA, Nachod, FC; Academic Press, New York, 1955), Data for Biochemical Research (OF: Dawson, RMCet al; Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1959 values) described in the. For compounds not described in these documents, the value calculated by the structural formula using software using ACD/pKa (manufactured by ACD/Labs) was used.

羧酸陰離子由下述式(X1)表示為較佳。 [化學式41]

Figure 02_image081
式(X1)中,EWG表示吸電子基。The carboxylic acid anion is preferably represented by the following formula (X1). [Chemical formula 41]
Figure 02_image081
In formula (X1), EWG represents an electron withdrawing group.

本實施方式中,吸電子基是指哈米特取代基常數σm表示正的值者。其中,σm於都野雄總說、Journal of Synthetic Organic Chemistry, Japan第23巻第8號(1965)p.631-642中進行詳細說明。此外,本實施方式中的吸電子基並不限定於上述文獻中所記載之取代基。 作為σm表示正的值之取代基的例,例如可列舉CF3 基(σm=0.43)、CF3 CO基(σm=0.63)、HC≡C基(σm=0.21)、CH2 =CH基(σm=0.06)、Ac基(σm=0.38)、MeOCO基(σm=0.37)、MeCOCH=CH基(σm=0.21)、PhCO基(σm=0.34)、H2 NCOCH2 基(σm=0.06)等。此外,Me表示甲基,Ac表示乙醯基,Ph表示苯基。In the present embodiment, the electron withdrawing group refers to a Hammett substituent constant σm showing a positive value. Among them, σm is described in detail in Tono Ooto, Journal of Synthetic Organic Chemistry, Japan Volume 23, No. 8 (1965) p.631-642. In addition, the electron withdrawing group in this embodiment is not limited to the substituent described in the above-mentioned document. Examples of substituents whose σm represents a positive value include CF 3 groups (σm=0.43), CF 3 CO groups (σm=0.63), HC≡C groups (σm=0.21), CH 2 =CH groups ( σm=0.06), Ac group (σm=0.38), MeOCO group (σm=0.37), MeCOCH=CH group (σm=0.21), PhCO group (σm=0.34), H 2 NCOCH 2 group (σm=0.06), etc. . In addition, Me represents a methyl group, Ac represents an acetyl group, and Ph represents a phenyl group.

EWG係由下述式(EWG-1)~(EWG-6)表示之基團為較佳。 [化學式42]

Figure 02_image083
式(EWG-1)~(EWG-6)中,Rx1 ~Rx3 分別獨立地表示氫原子、烷基、烯基、芳基、羥基或羧基,Ar表示芳香族基團。EWG is preferably a group represented by the following formulas (EWG-1) to (EWG-6). [Chemical formula 42]
Figure 02_image083
In the formulas (EWG-1) to (EWG-6), R x1 to R x3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a hydroxyl group, or a carboxyl group, and Ar represents an aromatic group.

本實施方式中,羧酸陰離子由下述式(XA)表示為較佳。 式(XA) [化學式43]

Figure 02_image085
式(XA)中,L10 表示選自單鍵或伸烷基、伸烯基、芳香族基團、-NRX -及它們的組合中之2價連接基,RX 表示氫原子、烷基、烯基或芳基。In this embodiment, the carboxylic acid anion is preferably represented by the following formula (XA). Formula (XA) [Chemical formula 43]
Figure 02_image085
In the formula (XA), L 10 represents a divalent linking group selected from a single bond or an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, an aromatic group, -NR X -and a combination thereof, and R X represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group , Alkenyl or aryl.

作為羧酸陰離子的具體例,可列舉馬來酸陰離子、鄰苯二甲酸陰離子、N-苯基亞胺基二乙酸陰離子及草酸陰離子。能夠較佳地使用該些。Specific examples of the carboxylic acid anion include maleic acid anion, phthalic acid anion, N-phenyliminodiacetic acid anion, and oxalic acid anion. These can be used preferably.

作為熱鹼產生劑的具體例,能夠列舉以下化合物。 [化學式44]

Figure 02_image087
[化學式45]
Figure 02_image089
As specific examples of the thermal base generator, the following compounds can be cited. [Chemical formula 44]
Figure 02_image087
[Chemical formula 45]
Figure 02_image089

[化學式46]

Figure 02_image091
[Chemical formula 46]
Figure 02_image091

當使用熱鹼產生劑時,感光性樹脂組成物中的熱鹼產生劑的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分,係0.1~50質量%為較佳。下限係0.5質量%以上為更佳,1質量%以上為進一步較佳。上限係30質量%以下為更佳,20質量%以下為進一步較佳。 熱鹼產生劑能夠使用一種或兩種以上。當使用兩種以上時,合計量係上述範圍為較佳。When a thermal alkali generator is used, the content of the thermal alkali generator in the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass relative to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition. The lower limit is more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 1% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 30% by mass or less, and more preferably 20% by mass or less. One kind or two or more kinds of thermal base generators can be used. When two or more are used, the total amount is preferably in the above-mentioned range.

<<<金屬黏附性改良劑>>> 本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物包含用於提高與使用於電極或配線等之金屬材料的黏附性之金屬黏附性改良劑為較佳。作為金屬黏附性改良劑的例,可列舉日本特開2014-186186號公報的0046~0049段、日本特開2013-072935號公報的0032~0043段中所記載之硫化物。作為金屬黏附性改良劑,還例示下述化合物(N-[3-(三乙氧基矽基)丙基]馬來酸單醯胺等)。 [化學式47]

Figure 02_image093
金屬黏附性改良劑相對於樹脂100質量份較佳為0.1~30質量份,更佳為0.5~15質量份的範圍。藉由設為0.1質量份以上,硬化製程後的硬化膜與金屬層的黏附性變良好,藉由設為30質量份以下,硬化製程後的硬化膜的耐熱性、機械特性變良好。 <<<Metal adhesion improver>>> The photosensitive resin composition used in the present embodiment preferably contains a metal adhesion improver for improving the adhesion to metal materials used in electrodes, wiring, and the like. Examples of the metal adhesion improver include the sulfides described in paragraphs 0046 to 0049 of JP 2014-186186 and paragraphs 0032 to 0043 of JP 2013-072935. As the metal adhesion improver, the following compounds (N-[3-(triethoxysilyl)propyl] maleic acid monoamide etc.) are also exemplified. [Chemical formula 47]
Figure 02_image093
The metal adhesion modifier is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 30 parts by mass, and more preferably in the range of 0.5 to 15 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin. By setting it as 0.1 parts by mass or more, the adhesion between the cured film and the metal layer after the curing process becomes good, and by setting it as 30 parts by mass or less, the heat resistance and mechanical properties of the cured film after the curing process become better.

金屬黏附性改良劑可以僅為一種,亦可以可兩種以上。當使用兩種以上時,其合計為上述範圍為較佳。 The metal adhesion modifier may be only one type or two or more types. When two or more are used, it is preferable that the sum total is the above-mentioned range.

<<<溶劑>>> <<<Solvent>>>

當將本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物藉由塗佈而形成為層狀時,對溶劑進行配合為較佳。關於溶劑,只要能夠將感光性樹脂組成物形成為層狀,則能夠任意使用公知者。作為溶劑,可列舉酯類、醚類、酮類、芳香族烴類、亞碸類等化合物。 When the photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment is formed into a layer by coating, it is preferable to blend a solvent. Regarding the solvent, any known ones can be used as long as the photosensitive resin composition can be formed into a layered form. Examples of solvents include compounds such as esters, ethers, ketones, aromatic hydrocarbons, and sulfites.

作為酯類,例如可較佳地列舉乙酸乙酯、乙酸正丁酯、乙酸異丁酯、甲酸戊酯、乙酸異戊酯、丙酸丁酯、丁酸異丙酯、丁酸乙酯、丁酸丁酯、乳酸甲酯、乳酸乙酯、γ-丁內酯、ε-己內酯、δ-戊內酯、烷氧基乙酸烷基酯(例:烷氧基乙酸甲酯、烷氧基乙酸乙酯、烷氧基乙酸丁酯(例如,甲氧基乙酸甲酯、甲氧基乙酸乙酯、甲氧基丁酯、乙氧基乙酸甲酯、乙氧基乙酸乙酯等))、3-烷氧基丙酸烷基酯類(例:3-烷氧基丙酸甲酯、3-烷氧基丙酸乙酯等(例如,3-甲氧基丙酸甲酯、3-甲氧基丙酸乙酯、3-乙氧基丙酸甲酯、3-乙氧基丙酸乙酯等))、2-烷氧基丙酸烷基酯類(例:2-烷氧基丙酸甲酯、2-烷氧基丙酸乙酯、2-烷氧基丙酸丙酯等(例如,2-甲氧基丙酸甲酯、2-甲氧基丙酸乙酯、2-甲氧基丙酸丙酯、2-乙氧基丙酸甲酯、2-乙氧基丙酸乙酯))、2-烷氧基-2-甲基丙酸甲酯及2-氧代-2-甲基丙酸乙酯(例如,2-甲氧基-2-甲基丙酸甲酯、2-乙氧基-2-甲基丙酸乙酯等)、丙酮酸甲酯、丙酮酸乙酯、丙酮酸丙酯、乙醯乙酸甲酯、乙醯乙酸乙酯、2-氧代丁酸甲酯、2-氧代丁酸乙酯等。 作為醚類,例如可較佳地列舉二甘醇二甲基醚、四氫呋喃、乙二醇一甲基醚、乙二醇單乙基醚、甲基賽路蘇乙酸酯、乙基賽路蘇乙酸酯、二甘醇一甲基醚、二甘醇一乙基醚、二甘醇一丁基醚、丙二醇單甲基醚、丙二醇單甲基醚乙酸酯、丙二醇單乙基醚乙酸酯、丙二醇單丙基醚乙酸酯等。 作為酮類,例如可較佳地列舉甲基乙基酮、環己酮、環戊酮,2-庚酮、3-庚酮、N-甲基-2-吡咯烷酮等。 作為芳香族烴類,例如可較佳地列舉甲苯、二甲苯、苯甲醚、檸檬烯等。As esters, for example, ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, pentyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl Butyl acid, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, γ-butyrolactone, ε-caprolactone, δ-valerolactone, alkyl alkoxy acetate (example: methyl alkoxy acetate, alkoxy Ethyl acetate, butyl alkoxyacetate (for example, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, methoxybutyl, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate, etc.)), 3-Alkoxy propionic acid alkyl esters (e.g. 3-alkoxy methyl propionate, 3-alkoxy ethyl propionate, etc. (e.g., 3-methoxy propionate methyl, 3-methyl Ethyl oxypropionate, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, etc.), alkyl 2-alkoxypropionate (e.g. 2-alkoxypropionate) Methyl ester, ethyl 2-alkoxypropionate, propyl 2-alkoxypropionate, etc. (for example, methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, 2-methyl Propyl oxypropionate, methyl 2-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate)), methyl 2-alkoxy-2-methylpropionate and 2-oxo-2 -Ethyl methyl propionate (for example, methyl 2-methoxy-2-methyl propionate, ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methyl propionate, etc.), methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate Ester, propyl pyruvate, methyl acetylacetate, ethyl acetylacetate, methyl 2-oxobutyrate, ethyl 2-oxobutyrate, etc. As the ethers, for example, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl siloxol acetate, ethyl siloxol Acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetic acid Ester, propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate, etc. As the ketones, for example, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, etc. are preferably mentioned. As aromatic hydrocarbons, for example, toluene, xylene, anisole, limonene, etc. are preferably mentioned.

關於溶劑,從塗佈面性狀的改良等的觀點考慮,混合兩種以上之形態亦為較佳。其中,由選自3-乙氧基丙酸甲酯、3-乙氧基丙酸乙酯、乙基賽路蘇乙酸酯、乳酸乙酯、二甘醇二甲基醚、乙酸丁酯、3-甲氧基丙酸甲酯、2-庚酮、環己酮、環戊酮、γ-丁內酯、二甲基亞碸、乙基卡必醇乙酸酯、丁基卡必醇乙酸酯、丙二醇甲基醚及丙二醇甲基醚乙酸酯中之兩種以上構成之混合溶液為較佳。同時使用二甲基亞碸和γ-丁內酯為特佳。Regarding the solvent, from the viewpoint of improving the properties of the coating surface, etc., a form in which two or more types are mixed is also preferable. Among them, it is selected from the group consisting of 3-ethoxy methyl propionate, 3-ethoxy ethyl propionate, ethyl cyrus acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, Methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, γ-butyrolactone, dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol ethyl A mixed solution composed of two or more of acid ester, propylene glycol methyl ether, and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate is preferable. It is particularly preferred to use both dimethyl sulfoxide and γ-butyrolactone.

當感光性樹脂組成物具有溶劑時,關於溶劑的含量,從塗佈性的觀點考慮,將感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分濃度設為成為5~80質量%之量為較佳,5~70質量%為進一步較佳,10~60質量%為特佳。溶劑含量依所希望的厚度並藉由塗佈方法來進行調節即可。例如,塗佈方法只要是旋塗法或狹縫塗佈法,則成為上述範圍的固體成分濃度之溶劑的含量為較佳。只要是噴塗法,則設為成為0.1質量%~50質量%之量為較佳,設為1.0質量%~25質量%為較佳。藉由塗佈方法調節溶劑量,藉此能夠均勻形成所希望的厚度的感光性樹脂組成物層。 溶劑可以僅為一種,亦可以係兩種以上。當溶劑係兩種以上時,其合計為上述範圍為較佳。 又,從膜強度的觀點考慮,N-甲基-2-吡咯烷酮、N-乙基-2-吡咯烷酮、N,N-二甲基乙醯胺及N,N-二甲基甲醯胺的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總質量小於5質量%為較佳,小於1質量%為更佳,小於0.5質量%為進一步較佳,小於0.1質量%為進一步較佳。When the photosensitive resin composition has a solvent, regarding the content of the solvent, from the viewpoint of coatability, the total solid content concentration of the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 5 to 80% by mass, 5 to 70% by mass is more preferable, and 10 to 60% by mass is particularly preferable. The solvent content can be adjusted by the coating method according to the desired thickness. For example, as long as the coating method is a spin coating method or a slit coating method, the content of the solvent having the solid content concentration in the above-mentioned range is preferable. As long as it is a spray method, it is preferable to set it as 0.1 mass%-50 mass %, and it is preferable to set it as 1.0 mass%-25 mass %. By adjusting the amount of the solvent by the coating method, a photosensitive resin composition layer with a desired thickness can be uniformly formed. The solvent may be only one type or two or more types. When two or more types of solvents are used, it is preferable that the sum total is the above range. Also, from the viewpoint of film strength, the content of N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-ethyl-2-pyrrolidone, N,N-dimethylacetamide and N,N-dimethylformamide It is preferably less than 5% by mass relative to the total mass of the photosensitive resin composition, more preferably less than 1% by mass, more preferably less than 0.5% by mass, and still more preferably less than 0.1% by mass.

<<<其他添加劑>>> 本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物在不損害本發明的效果之範圍內,能夠依需要對各種添加物,例如,光鹼產生劑、熱聚合起始劑、熱酸產生劑、矽烷偶聯劑、增感色素、鏈轉移劑、界面活性劑、高級脂肪酸衍生物、無機粒子、硬化劑、硬化催化劑、填充劑、抗氧化劑、紫外線吸收劑、凝聚抑制劑等進行配合。對該些添加劑進行配合時,將其合計配合量設為組成物的固體成分的3質量%以下為較佳。<<<Other additives>>> The photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment can be used for various additives, such as photobase generators, thermal polymerization initiators, as required, within the range that does not impair the effects of the present invention. Agents, thermal acid generators, silane coupling agents, sensitizing dyes, chain transfer agents, surfactants, higher fatty acid derivatives, inorganic particles, hardeners, hardening catalysts, fillers, antioxidants, ultraviolet absorbers, aggregation inhibitors Agent, etc. When these additives are blended, the total blending amount is preferably 3% by mass or less of the solid content of the composition.

(光鹼產生劑) 本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物可以包含光鹼產生劑。光鹼產生劑為藉由曝光產生鹼者,於常溫常壓的條件下不顯示活性,但作為外部刺激而進行電磁波的照射和加熱,則只要是產生鹼(鹼性物質)者就並無特別限定。藉由曝光而產生之鹼作為藉由加熱使聚醯亞胺前驅物及苯并噁唑前驅物等硬化時的催化劑而發揮功能,因此能夠較佳地使用於負型。(Photobase generator) The photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment may contain a photobase generator. Photobase generators are those that generate alkali by exposure and do not show activity under normal temperature and pressure conditions. However, if they are irradiated and heated by electromagnetic waves as an external stimulus, there is nothing special as long as they generate alkali (alkaline substances). limited. The base generated by exposure functions as a catalyst when the polyimide precursor and the benzoxazole precursor are hardened by heating, and therefore can be preferably used in the negative type.

作為光鹼產生劑的含量,只要能夠形成所希望的圖案就並無特別限定,能夠設為通常的含量。光鹼產生劑相對於樹脂100質量份係0.01質量份以上且小於30質量份的範圍內為較佳,係0.05質量份~25質量份的範圍內為更佳,係0.1質量份~20質量份的範圍內為進一步較佳。 光鹼產生劑可以僅為一種,亦可以係兩種以上。當光鹼產生劑為兩種以上時,其合計範圍係上述範圍為較佳。 本實施方式中,能夠使用作為光鹼產生劑而公知者。例如,如M.Shirai, and M.Tsunooka, Prog.Polym.Sci.,21,1(1996);角岡正弘,高分子加工,46,2(1997);C.Kutal,Coord.Chem.Rev.,211,353(2001);Y.Kaneko,A.Sarker, and D.Neckers,Chem.Mater.,11,170(1999);H.Tachi,M.Shirai, and M.Tsunooka,J.Photopolym.Sci.Technol.,13,153(2000);M.Winkle, and K.Graziano,J.Photopolym.Sci.Technol.,3,419(1990);M.Tsunooka,H.Tachi, and S.Yoshitaka,J.Photopolym.Sci.Technol.,9,13(1996);K.Suyama,H.Araki,M.Shirai,J.Photopolym.Sci.Technol.,19,81(2006)中所記載,能夠列舉遷移金屬化合物錯合物、具有銨鹽等的結構者、如脒基部分藉由形成羧酸和鹽而被潛在化者那樣,鹼成分藉由形成鹽而被中和之離子性化合物、胺甲酸酯衍生物、肟酯衍生物、醯基化合物等胺基甲酸酯鍵或肟鍵等而鹼成分被潛在化之非離子性化合物。 能夠使用於本實施方式之光鹼產生劑無特別限定而能夠使用公知者,例如,可列舉胺甲酸酯衍生物、醯胺衍生物、醯亞胺衍生物、α鈷錯合物類、咪唑衍生物、肉桂酸醯胺衍生物、肟衍生物等。 作為光鹼產生劑,例如,可列舉如於日本特開2009-80452號公報及國際公開WO2009/123122號中公開那樣具有肉桂酸醯胺結構之光鹼產生劑、如於日本特開2006-189591號公報及日本特開2008-247747號公報中公開那樣具有胺甲酸酯結構之光鹼產生劑、如於日本特開2007-249013號公報及日本特開2008-003581號公報中公開那樣具有肟結構、胺甲醯肟結構之光鹼產生劑等,但並不限定於此,還能夠使用除此以外的公知的光鹼產生劑。 此外,作為光鹼產生劑,作為例可列舉日本特開2012-93746號公報的0185~0188段、0199~0200段及0202段中所記載之化合物、日本特開2013-194205號公報的0022~0069段中所記載之化合物、日本特開2013-204019號公報的0026~0074段中所記載之化合物及國際公開WO2010/064631號的0052段中所記載之化合物。The content of the photobase generator is not particularly limited as long as it can form a desired pattern, and can be set to a normal content. The photobase generator is preferably within the range of 0.01 parts by mass or more and less than 30 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the resin, more preferably within the range of 0.05 parts by mass to 25 parts by mass, and is preferably 0.1 parts by mass to 20 parts by mass Within the range of is further preferred. The photobase generator may be one type or two or more types. When there are two or more photobase generators, the total range is preferably the above range. In this embodiment, what is known as a photobase generator can be used. For example, such as M. Shirai, and M. Tsunooka, Prog. Polym. Sci., 21, 1 (1996); Kadooka Masahiro, Polymer Processing, 46, 2 (1997); C. Kutal, Coord. Chem. Rev .,211,353(2001); Y.Kaneko,A.Sarker, and D.Neckers,Chem.Mater.,11,170(1999); H.Tachi,M.Shirai, and M.Tsunooka,J.Photopolym.Sci.Technol .,13,153(2000); M.Winkle, and K.Graziano,J.Photopolym.Sci.Technol.,3,419(1990); M.Tsunooka,H.Tachi, and S.Yoshitaka,J.Photopolym.Sci.Technol ., 9, 13 (1996); K. Suyama, H. Araki, M. Shirai, J. Photopolym. Sci. Technol., 19, 81 (2006), as described in the migration metal compound complex, having Structures such as ammonium salts, such as those where the amidino moiety is latentized by forming carboxylic acids and salts, ionic compounds, urethane derivatives, and oxime esters in which alkali components are neutralized by forming salts Nonionic compounds such as urethane bonds or oxime bonds, such as compounds, acyl compounds, etc., with alkali components latentized. The photobase generator that can be used in the present embodiment is not particularly limited, and known ones can be used. For example, carbamate derivatives, amide derivatives, imine derivatives, α-cobalt complexes, and imidazoles can be used. Derivatives, cinnamic acid amide derivatives, oxime derivatives, etc. Examples of photobase generators include photobase generators having a cinnamic acid amide structure as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2009-80452 and International Publication No. WO2009/123122, such as those disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2006-189591 A photobase generator having a urethane structure as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-247747 and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-247747 has an oxime as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-249013 and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-003581 Although it is not limited to the photobase generator of a structure, a carbamate structure, etc., well-known photobase generators other than these can also be used. In addition, examples of photobase generators include the compounds described in paragraphs 0185 to 0188, 0199 to 0200, and paragraph 0202 of JP 2012-93746 A, and 0022 to JP 2013-194205 of JP 2013-194205. The compound described in paragraph 0069, the compound described in paragraphs 0026 to 0074 of JP 2013-204019 A, and the compound described in paragraph 0052 of International Publication WO2010/064631.

(熱聚合起始劑) 本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物可以包含熱聚合起始劑(較佳為熱自由基聚合起始劑)。作為熱自由基聚合起始劑,能夠使用公知的熱自由基聚合起始劑。 熱自由基聚合起始劑係藉由熱的能量而產生自由基,並開始或促進聚合性化合物的聚合反應之化合物。藉由添加熱自由基聚合起始劑,於進行聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物的環化反應時,能夠進行聚合性化合物的聚合反應。又,當聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物包含烯屬不飽和鍵時,能夠同時進行聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物的環化和聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物的聚合反應,因此能夠實現更高度的耐熱化。 作為熱自由基聚合起始劑,具體而言,可列舉日本特開2008-63554號公報的0074~0118段中所記載之化合物。(Thermal polymerization initiator) The photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment may contain a thermal polymerization initiator (preferably a thermal radical polymerization initiator). As the thermal radical polymerization initiator, a known thermal radical polymerization initiator can be used. The thermal radical polymerization initiator is a compound that generates free radicals by thermal energy and initiates or promotes the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound. By adding a thermal radical polymerization initiator, the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound can proceed when the cyclization reaction of the polyimide precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor is performed. In addition, when the polyimide precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor contain ethylenically unsaturated bonds, the cyclization and polyimide of the polyimide precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor can be performed simultaneously The polymerization reaction of the precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor can achieve a higher degree of heat resistance. As the thermal radical polymerization initiator, specifically, the compounds described in paragraphs 0074 to 0118 of JP 2008-63554 A can be cited.

當感光性樹脂組成物具有熱自由基聚合起始劑時,熱自由基聚合起始劑的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分係0.1~50質量%為較佳,0.1~30質量%為更佳,0.1~20質量%為特佳。又,相對於聚合性化合物100質量份,包含0.1~50質量份的熱自由基聚合起始劑為較佳,包含0.5~30質量份為更佳。依該態樣,可輕鬆地形成耐熱性更加優異之硬化膜。 熱自由基聚合起始劑可以僅為一種,亦可以係兩種以上。當熱自由基聚合起始劑為兩種以上時,其合計範圍係上述範圍為較佳。When the photosensitive resin composition has a thermal radical polymerization initiator, the content of the thermal radical polymerization initiator relative to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 0.1-50% by mass, 0.1-30% by mass % Is more preferable, and 0.1-20% by mass is particularly preferable. Moreover, it is preferable to contain 0.1-50 mass parts of thermal radical polymerization initiators with respect to 100 mass parts of polymerizable compounds, and it is more preferable to contain 0.5-30 mass parts. According to this aspect, a cured film with more excellent heat resistance can be easily formed. The thermal radical polymerization initiator may be one type or two or more types. When there are two or more thermal radical polymerization initiators, the total range is preferably the above range.

(熱酸產生劑) 本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物可以包含熱酸產生劑。熱酸產生劑藉由加熱而產生酸,促進聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物的環化而提高硬化膜的機械特性。進而熱酸產生劑具有促進選自具有羥甲基、烷氧甲基或醯氧甲基之化合物、環氧化合物、氧雜環丁烷化合物及苯并噁嗪化合物中之至少一種化合物的交聯反應之效果。(Thermal acid generator) The photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment may contain a thermal acid generator. The thermal acid generator generates acid by heating, promotes the cyclization of the polyimide precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor, and improves the mechanical properties of the cured film. Furthermore, the thermal acid generator has the function of promoting crosslinking of at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a compound having a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group or an oxymethyl group, an epoxy compound, an oxetane compound, and a benzoxazine compound The effect of the reaction.

又,作為熱酸產生劑,日本特開2013-167742號公報的0059段中所記載之化合物亦為較佳。Moreover, as the thermal acid generator, the compound described in paragraph 0059 of JP 2013-167742 A is also preferable.

熱酸產生劑的含量相對於聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物100質量份係0.01質量份以上為較佳,0.1質量份以上為更佳。由於含有0.01質量份以上而促進交聯反應及聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物的環化,因此能夠進一步提高硬化膜的機械特性及耐薬品性。又,從硬化膜的電気絕緣性的觀點考慮,其含量係20質量份以下為較佳,15質量份以下為更佳,10質量份以下為特佳。 熱酸產生劑可以僅使用一種,亦可以使用兩種以上。當使用兩種以上時,合計量成為上述範圍為較佳。The content of the thermal acid generator is preferably 0.01 parts by mass or more relative to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor and polybenzoxazole precursor, and more preferably 0.1 parts by mass or more. Since the content is 0.01 parts by mass or more, the crosslinking reaction and the cyclization of the polyimide precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor are promoted, and therefore, the mechanical properties and chemical resistance of the cured film can be further improved. Also, from the viewpoint of the electrical insulation of the cured film, the content is preferably 20 parts by mass or less, more preferably 15 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 10 parts by mass or less. Only one type of thermal acid generator may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more are used, the total amount is preferably in the above range.

(矽烷偶聯劑) 本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物中,為了提高與基板的黏附性而可以包含矽烷偶聯劑。 作為矽烷偶聯劑的例,可列舉日本特開2014-191002號公報的0062~0073段中所記載之化合物、國際公開WO2011/080992A1號的0063~0071段中所記載之化合物、日本特開2014-191252號公報的0060~0061段中所記載之化合物、日本特開2014-41264號公報的0045~0052段中所記載之化合物、國際公開WO2014/097594號的0055段中所記載之化合物。又,如日本特開2011-128358號公報的0050~0058段中所記載那樣使用不同的兩種以上的矽烷偶聯劑亦為較佳。 矽烷偶聯劑相對於樹脂100質量份較佳為0.1~20質量份,更佳為1~10質量份的範圍。若為0.1質量份以上,則能夠賦予與基板充分的黏附性,若為20質量份以下,則於室溫保存時能夠抑制黏度上升等的問題。 矽烷偶聯劑可以僅使用一種,亦可以使用兩種以上。當使用兩種以上時,合計量成為上述範圍為較佳。(Silane Coupling Agent) The photosensitive resin composition used in the present embodiment may contain a silane coupling agent in order to improve the adhesion to the substrate. Examples of silane coupling agents include the compounds described in paragraphs 0062 to 0073 of JP 2014-191002, the compounds described in paragraphs 0063 to 0071 of International Publication WO2011/080992A1, and JP 2014 The compound described in paragraphs 0060 to 0061 of -191252, the compound described in paragraphs 0045 to 0052 of JP 2014-41264, and the compound described in paragraph 0055 of International Publication WO2014/097594. Furthermore, it is also preferable to use two or more different silane coupling agents as described in paragraphs 0050 to 0058 of JP 2011-128358 A. The silane coupling agent is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin, and more preferably in the range of 1 to 10 parts by mass. If it is 0.1 parts by mass or more, sufficient adhesion to the substrate can be imparted, and if it is 20 parts by mass or less, problems such as increase in viscosity can be suppressed during storage at room temperature. Only one type of silane coupling agent may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more are used, the total amount is preferably in the above range.

(增感色素) 本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物可以包含增感色素。增感色素吸收特定的活性放射線而成為電子励起狀態。成為電子励起狀態之增感色素與胺產生劑、熱自由基聚合起始劑、光聚合起始劑等接觸,而產生電子轉移、能量轉移、發熱等作用。藉此,胺產生劑、熱自由基聚合起始劑、光聚合起始劑引起化學變化而分解,並生成自由基、酸或鹼。(Sensitizing dye) The photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment may contain a sensitizing dye. The sensitizing dye absorbs specific active radiation and becomes an electron excited state. The sensitizing dye in an electron-excited state comes into contact with an amine generator, a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a photopolymerization initiator, etc., to generate electron transfer, energy transfer, heat generation, and the like. Thereby, the amine generator, thermal radical polymerization initiator, and photopolymerization initiator cause chemical changes to decompose, and generate radicals, acids, or bases.

作為較佳的增感色素的例,能夠列舉屬於以下化合物類,並且於300nm至450nm區域具有吸收波長者。例如,多核芳香族類(例如,菲、蒽、芘、苝、三伸苯、9.10-二烷氧基蒽)、呫噸類(例如,熒光素、曙紅、赤蘚紅、玫瑰紅B、孟加拉玫瑰紅)、硫雜蒽酮類(例如,2,4-二乙基硫雜蒽酮)、花青類(例如,硫雜羰花青、氧雜羰花青)、部花青類(例如部花青、羰部花青)、噻嗪類(例如噻嚀、亞甲藍、甲苯胺藍)、吖啶類(例如吖啶橙、氯黃素、吖啶黃素)、蒽醌類(例如蒽醌)、方酸內鎓鹽類(例如方酸內鎓鹽)、香豆素(coumarin)類(例如7-二乙基胺基-4-甲基香豆素)、苯乙烯基苯類、二苯乙烯基苯類、咔唑類等。As an example of a preferable sensitizing dye, those belonging to the following compound classes and having an absorption wavelength in the region of 300 nm to 450 nm can be cited. For example, polynuclear aromatics (e.g., phenanthrene, anthracene, pyrene, perylene, terylene, 9.10-dialkoxy anthracene), xanthenes (e.g., fluorescein, eosin, erythrosine, rose red B, Rose Bengal), thioxanthones (for example, 2,4-diethylthioxanthone), cyanines (for example, thiocarbocyanine, oxacarbocyanine), merocyanines ( For example, merocyanine, carbocyanine), thiazides (such as thiazol, methylene blue, toluidine blue), acridines (such as acridine orange, chloroflavin, acriflavin), anthraquinones (Such as anthraquinone), squaraine ylides (such as squaraine ylide), coumarins (such as 7-diethylamino-4-methylcoumarin), styryl Benzene, stilbene benzene, carbazole, etc.

當感光性樹脂組成物包含增感色素時,增感色素的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分係0.01~20質量%為較佳,0.1~15質量%為更佳,0.5~10質量%為進一步較佳。增感色素可以單獨使用一種,亦可以使用兩種以上。When the photosensitive resin composition contains a sensitizing dye, the content of the sensitizing dye is preferably 0.01-20% by mass relative to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition, more preferably 0.1-15% by mass, 0.5-10 The mass% is more preferable. The sensitizing dye may be used alone, or two or more kinds may be used.

(鏈轉移劑) 本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物可以含有鏈轉移劑。鏈轉移劑例如於高分子辞典第三版(高分子學會編、2005年)683-684頁中被定義。作為鏈轉移劑,例如使用於分子內具有SH、PH、SiH、GeH之化合物組。該些向低活性自由基供給氫而生成自由基,或者氧化之後,藉由去質子而可生成自由基。尤其,能夠較佳地使用硫醇化合物(例如,2-巰基苯并咪唑類、2-巰基苯并噻唑類、2-巰基苯并噁唑類、3-巰基三唑類、5-巰基四唑類等)。(Chain transfer agent) The photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment may contain a chain transfer agent. The chain transfer agent is defined in, for example, pages 683-684 of the third edition of the Polymer Dictionary (edited by the Society of Polymer Science, 2005). As the chain transfer agent, for example, a compound group having SH, PH, SiH, and GeH in the molecule is used. These low-activity free radicals are supplied with hydrogen to generate free radicals, or after oxidation, free radicals can be generated by deprotonation. In particular, thiol compounds (for example, 2-mercaptobenzimidazoles, 2-mercaptobenzothiazoles, 2-mercaptobenzoxazoles, 3-mercaptotriazoles, 5-mercaptotetrazole Class etc.).

當感光性樹脂組成物具有鏈轉移劑時,鏈轉移劑的較佳的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分100質量份,較佳為0.01~20質量份,更佳為1~10質量份,特佳為1~5質量份。 鏈轉移劑可以僅為一種,亦可以係兩種以上。當鏈轉移劑為兩種以上時,其合計範圍係上述範圍為較佳。When the photosensitive resin composition has a chain transfer agent, the preferred content of the chain transfer agent is preferably 0.01-20 parts by mass, more preferably 1-10 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition Parts by mass, particularly preferably 1 to 5 parts by mass. The chain transfer agent may be only one type or two or more types. When there are two or more chain transfer agents, the total range is preferably the above-mentioned range.

(界面活性劑) 從提高塗佈性的觀點考慮,本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物中,可以添加各種界面活性劑。作為界面活性劑,能夠使用氟系界面活性劑、非離子系界面活性劑、陽離子系界面活性劑、陰離子系界面活性劑、矽系界面活性劑等各種界面活性劑。又,下述界面活性劑亦為較佳。 [化學式48]

Figure 02_image095
(Surfactant) From the viewpoint of improving coatability, various surfactants can be added to the photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as fluorine-based surfactants, nonionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, anionic surfactants, and silicon-based surfactants can be used. In addition, the following surfactants are also preferable. [Chemical formula 48]
Figure 02_image095

當感光性樹脂組成物具有界面活性劑時,界面活性劑的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分,係0.001~2.0質量%為較佳,更佳為0.005~1.0質量%。 界面活性劑可以僅為一種,亦可以係兩種以上。當界面活性劑為兩種以上時,其合計範圍係上述範圍為較佳。When the photosensitive resin composition has a surfactant, the content of the surfactant relative to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 0.001 to 2.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005 to 1.0% by mass. The surfactant may be only one type or two or more types. When there are two or more surfactants, the total range is preferably the above-mentioned range.

(高級脂肪酸衍生物) 為了防止因氧引起之聚合抑制,本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物中,可以添加如山嵛酸或山嵛酸醯胺那樣的高級脂肪酸衍生物而於塗佈後的乾燥過程中局部存在於組成物的表面。 當感光性樹脂組成物具有高級脂肪酸衍生物時,高級脂肪酸衍生物的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分,係0.1~10質量%為較佳。 高級脂肪酸衍生物可以僅為一種,亦可以係兩種以上。當高級脂肪酸衍生物為兩種以上時,其合計範圍係上述範圍為較佳。(Higher fatty acid derivatives) In order to prevent polymerization inhibition due to oxygen, the photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment may be coated with a higher fatty acid derivative such as behenic acid or behenic acid amide. It is locally present on the surface of the composition during the subsequent drying process. When the photosensitive resin composition has a higher fatty acid derivative, the content of the higher fatty acid derivative relative to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass. The higher fatty acid derivative may be only one type or two or more types. When there are two or more higher fatty acid derivatives, the total range is preferably the above-mentioned range.

<<<關於其他含有物質之限制>>> 從塗佈面性狀的觀點考慮,本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物的水分含量小於5質量%為較佳,小於1質量%為更佳,小於0.6質量%為特佳。<<<Restrictions on other substances contained>>> From the viewpoint of coating surface properties, the photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment preferably has a moisture content of less than 5% by mass, and more preferably less than 1% by mass Preferably, less than 0.6% by mass is particularly preferred.

從絕緣性的觀點考慮,本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物的金屬含量小於5質量ppm(parts per million)為較佳,小於1質量ppm為更佳,小於0.5質量ppm為特佳。作為金屬,可列舉鈉、鉀、鎂、鈣、鐵、鉻、鎳等。當包含複數個金屬時,該些金屬的合計為上述範圍為較佳。 又,作為減少意外包含於感光性樹脂組成物之金屬雜質之方法,能夠列舉作為構成感光性樹脂組成物之原料而選擇金屬含量較少的原料,對構成感光性樹脂組成物之原料進行濾波器過濾,用聚四氟乙烯對裝置內進行內襯而於盡可能抑制了污染之條件下進行蒸餾等方法。From the viewpoint of insulation, the photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment preferably has a metal content of less than 5 mass ppm (parts per million), more preferably less than 1 mass ppm, and particularly preferably less than 0.5 mass ppm. . Examples of the metal include sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, chromium, nickel, and the like. When a plurality of metals are contained, the total of these metals is preferably in the above range. In addition, as a method of reducing the metal impurities accidentally included in the photosensitive resin composition, it can be cited as a raw material constituting the photosensitive resin composition, selecting a raw material with a low metal content, and filtering the raw material constituting the photosensitive resin composition Filtration, lining the device with polytetrafluoroethylene, and distilling under the condition of suppressing pollution as much as possible.

從配線腐蝕性的觀點考慮,本實施方式中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物中,鹵素原子的含量小於500質量ppm為較佳,小於300質量ppm為更佳,小於200質量ppm為特佳。其中,以鹵素離子的狀態存在者係小於5質量ppm為較佳,小於1質量ppm為更佳,小於0.5質量ppm為特佳。作為鹵素原子,可列舉氯原子及溴原子。氯原子及溴原子或氯化物離子及溴化物離子的合計分別為上述範圍為較佳。From the viewpoint of wiring corrosivity, in the photosensitive resin composition used in this embodiment, the content of halogen atoms is preferably less than 500 ppm by mass, more preferably less than 300 ppm by mass, and particularly preferably less than 200 ppm by mass. Among them, less than 5 mass ppm is preferred in the state of halogen ions, less than 1 mass ppm is more preferred, and less than 0.5 mass ppm is particularly preferred. Examples of the halogen atom include a chlorine atom and a bromine atom. It is preferable that the total of the chlorine atom and the bromine atom or the chloride ion and the bromide ion be in the above-mentioned ranges.

<<乾燥製程>> 可以包括於以層狀應用感光性樹脂組成物之後,對溶劑進行乾燥之製程。乾燥溫度係50~150℃為較佳,70℃~130℃為更佳,90℃~110℃為進一步較佳。作為乾燥時間,30秒鐘~20分鐘為較佳,1分鐘~10分鐘為更佳,3分鐘~7分鐘為進一步較佳。<<Drying process>> It can include a process of drying the solvent after applying the photosensitive resin composition in a layered form. The drying temperature is preferably 50 to 150°C, more preferably 70°C to 130°C, and even more preferably 90°C to 110°C. The drying time is preferably 30 seconds to 20 minutes, more preferably 1 minute to 10 minutes, and more preferably 3 minutes to 7 minutes.

<曝光顯影製程> 本實施方式中,對感光性樹脂膜進行曝光及顯影而製造樹脂圖案3。樹脂圖案的厚度與感光性樹脂膜的厚度相同,0.1~100μm為較佳,1~50μm為更佳,3~20μm為進一步較佳。<Exposure and Development Process> In this embodiment, the photosensitive resin film is exposed and developed to produce the resin pattern 3. The thickness of the resin pattern is the same as the thickness of the photosensitive resin film, and is preferably 0.1 to 100 μm, more preferably 1 to 50 μm, and more preferably 3 to 20 μm.

<<曝光製程>> 曝光的條件並無特別限定,使相對於感光性樹脂膜的曝光部的顯影液之溶解度改變為較佳,能夠對感光性樹脂膜的曝光部進行硬化為更佳。例如,關於曝光,對感光性樹脂膜照射波長500nm以下的光而進行為較佳。藉由照射波長為500nm以下的光,能夠使得不易從透明基板剝離感光性樹脂。 曝光波長的下限係100nm以上為較佳,190nm以上為更佳,240nm以上為進一步較佳。曝光波長的上限係500nm以下為較佳,400nm以下為更佳。 關於曝光量,以於波長365nm下的曝光能量換算為100~10000mJ/cm2 為較佳,200~8000mJ/cm2 為更佳。<<Exposure process>> The conditions of exposure are not particularly limited, but it is better to change the solubility of the developer with respect to the exposed portion of the photosensitive resin film, and it is more preferable that the exposed portion of the photosensitive resin film can be cured. For example, as for exposure, it is preferable to irradiate the photosensitive resin film with light having a wavelength of 500 nm or less. By irradiating light with a wavelength of 500 nm or less, it is possible to make it difficult to peel the photosensitive resin from the transparent substrate. The lower limit of the exposure wavelength is preferably 100 nm or more, more preferably 190 nm or more, and more preferably 240 nm or more. The upper limit of the exposure wavelength is preferably 500 nm or less, and more preferably 400 nm or less. Regarding the amount of exposure, the exposure energy at a wavelength of 365 nm is preferably 100 to 10000 mJ/cm 2 , and more preferably 200 to 8000 mJ/cm 2 .

曝光時,為了形成所希望的樹脂圖案,使用遮罩7為較佳。遮罩的開口率能夠依所希望的圖案適當設定。 為負型顯影時,去除感光性樹脂膜的一部分而形成之樹脂圖案的被去除之部分的表面積係感光性樹脂膜的所有區域的表面積的30%以下為較佳,25%以下為更佳,20%以下為進一步較佳,15%以下為進一步較佳,10%以下為更進一步較佳,5%以下為更進一步較佳,3%以下為尤其進一步較佳。藉由設為該種範圍,所得到之成形品的成品率處於進一步提高之傾向。去除感光性樹脂膜的一部分而形成之樹脂圖案的被去除之部分的表面積佔感光性樹脂膜的所有區域的表面積之比例的下限值並無特別限定,例如能夠設為0.5%以上。 遮罩的開口部的大小能夠依用途等適當設定,例示如成為最大長度係30μm以下(較佳為,最大長度係3μm以上)的開口部那樣的遮罩。At the time of exposure, in order to form a desired resin pattern, a mask 7 is preferably used. The aperture ratio of the mask can be appropriately set according to the desired pattern. In the case of negative development, the surface area of the removed part of the resin pattern formed by removing a part of the photosensitive resin film is preferably 30% or less of the surface area of all areas of the photosensitive resin film, and more preferably 25% or less. 20% or less is more preferable, 15% or less is more preferable, 10% or less is even more preferable, 5% or less is still more preferable, and 3% or less is particularly more preferable. By setting it in this range, the yield of the obtained molded product tends to be further improved. The lower limit of the ratio of the surface area of the removed portion of the resin pattern formed by removing a part of the photosensitive resin film to the surface area of all regions of the photosensitive resin film is not particularly limited, and can be set to 0.5% or more, for example. The size of the opening of the mask can be appropriately set depending on the use and the like, and an example of a mask such as an opening having a maximum length of 30 μm or less (preferably, a maximum length of 3 μm or more) is exemplified.

本實施方式中所形成之樹脂圖案的間隙(開口部)成為接觸孔、設置配線之部位、設置電極之部位等。配線或電極藉由應用後述之金屬而形成。The gaps (openings) of the resin pattern formed in this embodiment are contact holes, locations where wiring is provided, locations where electrodes are provided, and the like. The wiring or electrode is formed by applying the metal mentioned later.

<<顯影處理製程>> 顯影處理製程可以係正型顯影處理,亦可以係負型顯影處理,但負型顯影處理為較佳。藉由進行負型顯影,未曝光之部分(非曝光部)被去除。顯影方法並無特別限制,能夠形成所希望的圖案為較佳,例如能夠採用攪拌、噴塗、浸漬、超音波等顯影方法。 顯影使用顯影液進行為較佳。顯影液只要係去除了未曝光之部分(非曝光部)者,則能夠無特別限制地使用。使用了有機溶劑之顯影為較佳,作為酯類,例如可列舉乙酸乙酯、乙酸正丁酯、乙酸異丁酯、甲酸戊酯、乙酸異戊酯、丙酸丁酯、丁酸異丙酯、丁酸乙酯、丁酸丁酯、乳酸甲酯、乳酸乙酯、γ-丁內酯、ε-己內酯,δ-戊內酯、烷氧基乙酸烷基酯(例:烷氧基乙酸甲酯、烷氧基乙酸乙酯、烷氧基乙酸丁酯(例如,甲氧基乙酸甲酯、甲氧基乙酸乙酯、甲氧基乙酸丁酯、乙氧基乙酸甲酯、乙氧基乙酸乙酯等))、3-烷氧基丙酸烷基酯類(例:3-烷氧基丙酸甲酯、3-烷氧基丙酸乙酯等(例如,3-甲氧基丙酸甲酯、3-甲氧基丙酸乙酯、3-乙氧基丙酸甲酯、3-乙氧基丙酸乙酯等))、2-烷氧基丙酸烷基酯類(例:2-烷氧基丙酸甲酯、2-烷氧基丙酸乙酯、2-烷氧基丙酸丙酯等(例如,2-甲氧基丙酸甲酯、2-甲氧基丙酸乙酯、2-甲氧基丙酸丙酯、2-乙氧基丙酸甲酯、2-乙氧基丙酸乙酯))、2-烷氧基-2-甲基丙酸甲酯及2-烷氧基-2-甲基丙酸乙酯(例如,2-甲氧基-2-甲基丙酸甲酯、2-乙氧基-2-甲基丙酸乙酯等)、丙酮酸甲酯、丙酮酸乙酯、丙酮酸丙酯、乙醯乙酸甲酯、乙醯乙酸乙酯、2-氧代丁酸甲酯、2-氧代丁酸乙酯等,以及作為醚類,例如可列舉二乙二醇二甲醚、四氫呋喃、乙二醇單甲醚、乙二醇單乙醚、甲基溶纖劑乙酸酯、乙基溶纖劑乙酸酯、二乙二醇單甲醚、二乙二醇單乙醚、二乙二醇單丁醚、丙二醇單甲醚、丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯、丙二醇單乙醚乙酸酯、丙二醇單丙醚乙酸酯等。 作為酮類,例如可列舉甲基乙基酮、環己酮、環戊酮、2-庚酮、3-庚酮、N-甲基-2-吡咯啶酮等。 作為芳香族烴類,例如可列舉甲苯、二甲苯、大茴香醚、檸檬烯等。 作為亞碸類,可較佳地列舉二甲基亞碸。 其中,3-乙氧基丙酸甲酯、3-乙氧基丙酸乙酯、乙基溶纖劑乙酸酯、乳酸乙酯、二乙二醇二甲醚、乙酸丁酯、3-甲氧基丙酸甲酯、2-庚酮、環己酮、環戊酮、γ-丁內酯、二甲基亞碸、乙基卡必醇乙酸酯、丁基卡必醇乙酸酯、丙二醇甲醚及丙二醇甲醚乙酸酯為較佳,環戊酮、γ-丁內酯為更佳。 顯影時間係10秒鐘~5分鐘為較佳。 顯影時的溫度並無特別限定,通常能夠於20~40℃下進行。 於使用了顯影液之處理之後,進而可以進行沖洗。沖洗以與顯影液不同之溶劑進行為較佳。例如,能夠使用感光性樹脂組成物中所含有之溶劑進行沖洗。沖洗時間係5秒鐘~1分鐘為較佳。<<Development treatment process>> The development treatment process can be a positive type development treatment or a negative type development treatment, but a negative type development treatment is preferable. By performing negative-tone development, the unexposed part (non-exposed part) is removed. The development method is not particularly limited, and it is preferable that a desired pattern can be formed. For example, a development method such as stirring, spraying, dipping, and ultrasonic can be used. The development is preferably performed using a developer. The developer can be used without particular limitation as long as the unexposed part (non-exposed part) is removed. Development using organic solvents is preferred. Examples of esters include ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, pentyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, and isopropyl butyrate. , Ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, γ-butyrolactone, ε-caprolactone, δ-valerolactone, alkyl alkoxy acetate (example: alkoxy Methyl acetate, ethyl alkoxyacetate, butyl alkoxyacetate (for example, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethoxy Ethyl acetate, etc.)), 3-alkoxypropionic acid alkyl esters (e.g. 3-alkoxy methyl propionate, 3-alkoxy ethyl propionate, etc. (e.g. 3-methoxy Methyl propionate, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, etc.)), alkyl 2-alkoxypropionate ( Examples: Methyl 2-alkoxypropionate, ethyl 2-alkoxypropionate, propyl 2-alkoxypropionate, etc. (for example, methyl 2-methoxypropionate, 2-methoxypropionate Ethyl propionate, propyl 2-methoxypropionate, methyl 2-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate)), methyl 2-alkoxy-2-methylpropionate Ester and ethyl 2-alkoxy-2-methylpropionate (for example, methyl 2-methoxy-2-methylpropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate, etc.) , Methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate, propyl pyruvate, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, methyl 2-oxobutyrate, ethyl 2-oxobutyrate, etc., and as ether Class, for example, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol Monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate, etc. Examples of ketones include methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone. Examples of aromatic hydrocarbons include toluene, xylene, anisole, limonene and the like. As the sulfenite, preferably dimethyl sulfenite can be cited. Among them, 3-ethoxy methyl propionate, 3-ethoxy ethyl propionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, 3-methyl Methyl oxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, γ-butyrolactone, dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, Propylene glycol methyl ether and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate are preferred, and cyclopentanone and γ-butyrolactone are more preferred. The development time is preferably 10 seconds to 5 minutes. The temperature during development is not particularly limited, and it can usually be performed at 20 to 40°C. After treatment with developer, it can be rinsed. Rinsing is preferably performed with a solvent different from the developer. For example, the solvent contained in the photosensitive resin composition can be used for rinsing. Preferably, the rinsing time is 5 seconds to 1 minute.

<硬化製程> 本實施方式中,曝光顯影製程後,於透明基板剝離製程前,包括硬化製程為較佳。又,當包括金屬應用製程時,於金屬應用製程前,包括對上述樹脂圖案進行硬化之硬化製程為較佳。 當感光性樹脂膜包含選自聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物中之至少一種時,藉由硬化製程,能夠進行聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物的環化反應。又,即使感光性樹脂膜為聚醯亞胺或聚苯并噁唑之情況下,能夠與交聯劑一同加熱而形成3維網結構。進而,當感光性樹脂組成物含有自由基聚合性化合物等時,還能夠進行未反應的自由基聚合性化合物的硬化等。 關於硬化製程,通常藉由將感光性樹脂膜升溫至構成感光性樹脂膜之樹脂的玻璃化轉變溫度以上的溫度而進行。又,已升溫時的最終到達溫度係如下溫度為較佳,亦即當感光性樹脂膜包含選自聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物中之至少一種時,感光性樹脂膜中所含有之樹脂的環化溫度以上。 已升溫時的最終到達溫度係最高加熱溫度為較佳。作為最高加熱溫度,100~500℃為較佳,150~450℃為更佳,160~350℃為進一步較佳。<Curing process> In this embodiment, after the exposure and development process, it is preferable to include a curing process before the transparent substrate peeling process. In addition, when the metal application process is included, it is preferable to include a curing process of curing the above-mentioned resin pattern before the metal application process. When the photosensitive resin film contains at least one selected from the group consisting of polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors, through the curing process, the polyimide precursor and polybenzoxazole precursor can be cured Cyclization reaction. In addition, even when the photosensitive resin film is made of polyimide or polybenzoxazole, it can be heated together with a crosslinking agent to form a three-dimensional network structure. Furthermore, when the photosensitive resin composition contains a radical polymerizable compound etc., hardening etc. of an unreacted radical polymerizable compound can also be performed. The curing process is generally performed by raising the temperature of the photosensitive resin film to a temperature higher than the glass transition temperature of the resin constituting the photosensitive resin film. In addition, it is preferable that the final temperature reached when the temperature is increased is as follows. That is, when the photosensitive resin film contains at least one selected from the group consisting of polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors, the photosensitive resin film Above the cyclization temperature of the resin contained in it. It is preferable that the final reached temperature when the temperature is increased is the highest heating temperature. As the maximum heating temperature, 100 to 500°C is preferred, 150 to 450°C is more preferred, and 160 to 350°C is even more preferred.

關於升溫,從20~150℃的溫度至最高加熱溫度以1~12℃/分鐘的升溫速度進行為較佳,2~11℃/分鐘為更佳,3~10℃/分鐘為進一步較佳。藉由將升溫速度設為1℃/分鐘以上,能夠確保生產性的同時防止胺的過度揮發,藉由將升溫速度設為12℃/分鐘以下,能夠緩和硬化膜的殘留應力。 加熱開始時的溫度係20~150℃為較佳,20℃~130℃為更佳,25℃~120℃為進一步較佳。加熱開始時的溫度是指開始直至最高加熱溫度進行加熱之製程時的加熱溫度。例如,將感光性樹脂組成物應用於基板上之後,使其乾燥時,為該乾燥後的溫度,例如,從感光性樹脂組成物中所含有之溶劑的沸點-(30~200)℃逐漸升溫為較佳。Regarding the temperature increase, it is preferable to proceed from a temperature of 20 to 150°C to the maximum heating temperature at a temperature increase rate of 1 to 12°C/min, more preferably 2 to 11°C/min, and still more preferably 3 to 10°C/min. By setting the heating rate to 1°C/min or more, it is possible to prevent excessive volatilization of amine while ensuring productivity, and by setting the heating rate to 12°C/min or less, the residual stress of the cured film can be relaxed. The temperature at the start of heating is preferably 20 to 150°C, more preferably 20 to 130°C, and more preferably 25 to 120°C. The temperature at the beginning of heating refers to the heating temperature at the beginning of the heating process up to the maximum heating temperature. For example, when the photosensitive resin composition is applied to the substrate and dried, the temperature after drying is, for example, the temperature is gradually increased from the boiling point of the solvent contained in the photosensitive resin composition-(30 to 200)°C For better.

加熱可以分階段進行。作為例,可以進行如下前處理製程,亦即直至25℃~180℃以3℃/分鐘進行升溫,於180℃下放置60分鐘,且直至180~200℃以2℃/分鐘進行升溫,於200℃下放置120分鐘。作為前處理製程的加熱係100~200℃為較佳,110~190℃為更佳,120~185℃為最佳。於該前處理製程中,如美國專利9159547號中所記載那樣照射UV的同時進行處理亦為較佳。藉由這種前處理製程,能夠提高硬化膜的特性。前處理製程於10秒鐘~2小時左右的較短的時間內進行為較佳,15秒鐘~30分鐘為更佳。前處理製程可以係兩個階段以上的步驟,例如於100~150℃的範圍進行前處理製程1,之後於150~200℃的範圍進行前處理製程2。Heating can be carried out in stages. As an example, the following pre-treatment process can be performed, that is, the temperature is raised at 3°C/min until 25°C to 180°C, the temperature is raised at 180°C for 60 minutes, and the temperature is raised at 2°C/min until 180°C to 200°C. Place at ℃ for 120 minutes. The heating system used as the pre-treatment process is preferably 100-200°C, more preferably 110-190°C, and most preferably 120-185°C. In the pretreatment process, it is also preferable to perform treatment while irradiating UV as described in US Patent No. 9159547. Through this pretreatment process, the characteristics of the cured film can be improved. The pretreatment process is preferably carried out in a relatively short time of about 10 seconds to 2 hours, and more preferably 15 seconds to 30 minutes. The pretreatment process can be a two-stage or more step, for example, the pretreatment process 1 is performed at a range of 100-150°C, and then the pretreatment process 2 is performed at a range of 150-200°C.

升溫時間係20~200分鐘為較佳,20~100分鐘為更佳。The heating time is preferably 20 to 200 minutes, and more preferably 20 to 100 minutes.

本實施方式中,藉由升溫達到最終到達溫度之後,於上述最終到達溫度下進行30~360分鐘的加熱為較佳,能夠進行30~300分鐘的加熱為更佳,進行30~240分鐘的加熱為特佳。In this embodiment, after the temperature is increased to the final temperature, it is preferable to perform heating at the final temperature for 30 to 360 minutes, and it is more preferable to be able to perform heating for 30 to 300 minutes, and to perform heating for 30 to 240 minutes. It is especially good.

本實施方式中,於升溫製程後對感光性樹脂膜進行冷卻為較佳。冷卻速度係2℃/分鐘以下為較佳,1℃/分鐘以下為更佳。冷卻製程的降溫速度係0.1℃/分鐘以上為較佳。冷卻時間係30~600分鐘為較佳,60~600分鐘為更佳,120~600分鐘為特佳。In this embodiment, it is preferable to cool the photosensitive resin film after the heating process. The cooling rate is preferably 2°C/min or less, and more preferably 1°C/min or less. The cooling rate of the cooling process is preferably 0.1°C/min or more. The cooling time is preferably 30 to 600 minutes, more preferably 60 to 600 minutes, and particularly preferably 120 to 600 minutes.

冷卻後的溫度比硬化製程後的感光性樹脂膜的玻璃化轉變溫度(Tg)低30℃以上為較佳。若冷卻後的溫度降溫至比感光性樹脂膜的Tg低30℃以上的溫度,則聚醯亞胺被充分硬化,並且容易抑制層間剝離的產生。The temperature after cooling is preferably lower than the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the photosensitive resin film after the curing process by 30° C. or more. If the temperature after cooling is lowered to a temperature that is 30°C or more lower than the Tg of the photosensitive resin film, the polyimide is sufficiently cured, and the occurrence of delamination is easily suppressed.

<金屬應用製程> 本實施方式中,具有對具有透明基板1和位於上述透明基板的表面之樹脂圖案3之積層體應用金屬4之製程為較佳。本實施方式中的金屬4設置於透明基板1的表面上的樹脂圖案3的間隙為較佳。作為金屬的應用方法,並無特別限定,可列舉無電解電鍍方法。 又,還能夠設置於透明基板上的透明基板1與樹脂圖案3之間。作為於透明基板1與樹脂圖案3之間設置金屬之態樣,例示於透明基板1的表面與樹脂圖案3之間及透明基板1上,且與透明基板1大致垂直之方向上的樹脂圖案3與樹脂圖案3之間設置之態様。 當為無電解電鍍方法時,按照以下(1)及(2)的方法應用金屬為較佳。 (1)於包含無電解電鍍液之電鍍槽中浸漬具有透明基板1和樹脂圖案3之積層體,並於透明基板1的表面及樹脂圖案3的表面分別形成金屬層(電鍍膜)。此時的金屬層的厚度係0.1~100μm為較佳,1~20μm為更佳,1~10μm為特佳。金屬層可以係1層,亦可以係2層以上。 (2)接著,藉由研磨等對金屬層中的設置於樹脂圖案3的表面之金屬層等不需要的金屬層進行削除,而使樹脂圖案露出。 無電解電鍍的詳細內容能夠參閱日刊工業新聞社:電鍍研究會編“電鍍基礎的基礎”2006年6月28日、日刊工業新聞社:電鍍研究會編“下一代電鍍技術”2004年11月30日的記載,並將該些記載編入本說明書。 又,作為另一金屬的應用方法,例示蒸鍍等。該情況下的金屬層的厚度亦係與上述無電解電鍍方法的情況相同之範圍為較佳。<Metal Application Process> In this embodiment, a process in which metal 4 is applied to a laminate having a transparent substrate 1 and a resin pattern 3 located on the surface of the transparent substrate is preferable. The metal 4 in this embodiment is preferably provided in the gap of the resin pattern 3 on the surface of the transparent substrate 1. The application method of the metal is not particularly limited, and an electroless plating method can be mentioned. Moreover, it can also be provided between the transparent substrate 1 and the resin pattern 3 on a transparent substrate. As an aspect of disposing a metal between the transparent substrate 1 and the resin pattern 3, the resin pattern 3 in a direction substantially perpendicular to the transparent substrate 1 between the surface of the transparent substrate 1 and the resin pattern 3 and on the transparent substrate 1 It is set between the resin pattern 3. When it is an electroless plating method, it is better to apply metal according to the following methods (1) and (2). (1) Immerse the laminate with the transparent substrate 1 and the resin pattern 3 in a plating tank containing an electroless plating solution, and form a metal layer (plating film) on the surface of the transparent substrate 1 and the surface of the resin pattern 3, respectively. The thickness of the metal layer at this time is preferably 0.1 to 100 μm, more preferably 1 to 20 μm, and particularly preferably 1 to 10 μm. The metal layer may be one layer, or two or more layers. (2) Next, unnecessary metal layers such as the metal layer provided on the surface of the resin pattern 3 among the metal layers are scraped off by polishing or the like to expose the resin pattern. For details of electroless plating, please refer to Nikkan Kogyo Shimbun: Electroplating Research Association "Basics of Electroplating" June 28, 2006, Nikkan Kogyo Shimbun: Electroplating Research Association "Next Generation Plating Technology" November 30, 2004 And incorporate these records into this manual. In addition, as another metal application method, vapor deposition or the like is exemplified. The thickness of the metal layer in this case is also preferably in the same range as in the case of the above-mentioned electroless plating method.

作為本實施方式中所使用之金屬,包含銅、鋁、鎳、釩、鈦、鉭、鉻、鈷、金、銀及鎢中的至少一種為較佳,當進行無電解電鍍時,銅為特佳。金屬可以係一種亦可以係兩種。As the metal used in this embodiment, it is preferable to include at least one of copper, aluminum, nickel, vanadium, titanium, tantalum, chromium, cobalt, gold, silver, and tungsten. When electroless plating is performed, copper is special good. The metal can be one type or two types.

<積層製程> 本實施方式中,還可以將樹脂圖案3和金屬層進一步積層複數層。具體而言,於金屬應用製程之後,進而能夠反覆再次進行製造樹脂圖案之製程。<Laminating Process> In this embodiment, the resin pattern 3 and the metal layer may be further laminated in plural layers. Specifically, after the metal application process, the process of manufacturing the resin pattern can be repeated again and again.

<半導體元件應用製程> 本實施方式中,進而可以包括應用半導體元件5之製程。具體而言,具有透明基板1、位於上述透明基板的表面之樹脂圖案3、位於上述透明基板的表面上的上述樹脂圖案的間隙之金屬4及與上述金屬相接之半導體元件5,上述半導體元件5以於與透明基板側相反的一側與上述金屬相接之方式配置為較佳。其中,樹脂圖案的間隙是指透明基板上的設置有樹脂圖案之一側的樹脂與樹脂之間的區域,例如是指對感光性樹脂進行曝光顯影而得到之開口部。又,當積層樹脂圖案時,成為下層的樹脂圖案和/或金屬的表面上的樹脂與樹脂之間的區域。 作為其中的半導體元件,例示半導體晶片等。<Semiconductor element application process> In this embodiment, the process of applying the semiconductor element 5 may further be included. Specifically, it has a transparent substrate 1, a resin pattern 3 located on the surface of the transparent substrate, a metal 4 located on the surface of the transparent substrate with a gap between the resin pattern, and a semiconductor element 5 in contact with the metal, the semiconductor element 5 It is preferable to arrange it in such a way that it is in contact with the above-mentioned metal on the side opposite to the transparent substrate side. Here, the gap of the resin pattern refers to the area between the resin and the resin on the side where the resin pattern is provided on the transparent substrate, and refers to, for example, an opening obtained by exposing and developing a photosensitive resin. Moreover, when the resin pattern is laminated, it becomes an area between the resin and the resin on the surface of the resin pattern and/or metal of the lower layer. As a semiconductor element among these, a semiconductor wafer etc. are illustrated.

<透明基板剝離製程> <Transparent substrate peeling process>

本實施方式中,包括從積層體的透明基板側對具有透明基板1和位於上述透明基板的表面之樹脂圖案之積層體6照射輻射光,且從上述積層體剝離透明基板之剝離製程。照射上述輻射光時,將所照射之輻射光的波長中的樹脂圖案的吸光度設為0.5以上。藉由該種結構,對樹脂圖案的透明基板側的表面附近進行照射,從而能夠進行透明基板與樹脂圖案的剝離。又,本實施方式中,金屬等亦存在於基材表面,但透明基板和金屬通常黏附性較弱,因此金屬亦與樹脂圖案一同殘留於積層體側。 In this embodiment, the layered body 6 having the transparent substrate 1 and the resin pattern on the surface of the transparent substrate is irradiated from the transparent substrate side of the layered body with radiation, and the transparent substrate is peeled from the layered body. When the above-mentioned radiation light is irradiated, the absorbance of the resin pattern in the wavelength of the irradiated radiation light is set to 0.5 or more. With this structure, the surface vicinity of the transparent substrate side of the resin pattern is irradiated, so that the transparent substrate and the resin pattern can be peeled off. In addition, in the present embodiment, metal and the like are also present on the surface of the substrate, but the transparent substrate and the metal are generally weak in adhesion, so the metal also remains on the laminate side together with the resin pattern.

本實施方式中,上述吸光度係0.5以上,0.8以上為較佳,1.0以上為更佳,1.2以上為進一步較佳。上述吸光度的上限值並無特別限制,越高越較佳,例如為9以下,進而為6以下,尤其係4以下時亦能夠充分地實現本發明的效果。 In this embodiment, the above-mentioned absorbance is 0.5 or more, preferably 0.8 or more, more preferably 1.0 or more, and even more preferably 1.2 or more. The upper limit of the above-mentioned absorbance is not particularly limited, and the higher the value, the better. For example, it is 9 or less, and furthermore, 6 or less, especially when it is 4 or less, the effect of the present invention can be sufficiently achieved.

輻射光的波長係透過透明基板,並由樹脂圖案吸收之波長為較佳,因此能夠依所使用之材料適當設定。例如,需要能夠確保透過波長較寬的石英的透明性,下限係170nm以上為較佳,220nm以上為更佳,260nm以上為進一步較佳。又,上述波長的上限係4000nm以下為較佳,3000nm以下為更佳。 The wavelength of the radiated light passes through the transparent substrate and is preferably absorbed by the resin pattern, so it can be appropriately set according to the material used. For example, it is necessary to ensure the transparency of quartz with a wide transmission wavelength. The lower limit is preferably 170 nm or more, more preferably 220 nm or more, and even more preferably 260 nm or more. Furthermore, the upper limit of the aforementioned wavelength is preferably 4000 nm or less, and more preferably 3000 nm or less.

雷射的種類並無特別限定,YAG雷射(釔-鋁-石榴石雷射)的THG(Third Harmonic Generation)(355nm)或準分子雷射中的KrF(248nm)、XeCl(308nm)、XeF(351nm)為較佳。 The type of laser is not particularly limited. THG (Third Harmonic Generation) (355nm) of YAG laser (yttrium-aluminum-garnet laser) or KrF (248nm), XeCl (308nm), XeF in excimer lasers (351nm) is preferred.

照射輻射光時,將焦點設為位於透明基板1與樹脂圖案3的界面±10μm的距離為較佳。又,雷射光源係於100~1000000μm2 的面積中,重複頻率10~5000Hz,掃描速度0.1~1000mm/s為較佳。掃描間距係1~100μm為較佳。作為曝光量,0.5~50J/cm2 為較佳。When irradiating the radiant light, it is preferable to set the focus to a distance of ±10 μm from the interface between the transparent substrate 1 and the resin pattern 3. In addition, the laser light source is preferably in an area of 100 to 1,000,000 μm 2 , the repetition frequency is 10 to 5000 Hz, and the scanning speed is preferably 0.1 to 1000 mm/s. The scanning pitch is preferably 1-100 μm. As the exposure amount, 0.5-50 J/cm 2 is preferable.

第2實施方式 圖2係表示第2實施方式之示意圖,於透明基板1的表面設置種子層21,進而於種子層的表面設置光阻層22,進行曝光及顯影而形成光阻圖案23之後,應用金屬而去除光阻圖案23之後,削除種子層21而製作金屬圖案24(金屬圖案形成製程)。接著,於金屬圖案24之間設置樹脂圖案3(樹脂圖案形成製程)。又,從金屬圖案24的與透明基板1相反的一側,進而應用半導體元件5之後(半導體元件應用製程),以滿足規定條件之方式照射輻射光,藉此能夠從積層體6剝離透明基板1(透明基板剝離製程)。本實施方式中,尤其依次為金屬圖案形成製程、樹脂圖案形成製程、半導體元件應用製程及透明基板剝離製程為較佳。 此外,圖2中,對與圖1共同的部件使用相同的符號(關於圖3亦相同)。 第2實施方式中,可得到使金屬(例如,金屬配線或電極)位於樹脂圖案(例如,絕緣層)的間隙,進而具有與上述金屬相接之半導體元件(例如,半導體晶片)之半導體裝置。以下,對第2實施方式進行更加具體的說明。Second Embodiment FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the second embodiment. A seed layer 21 is provided on the surface of a transparent substrate 1, and a photoresist layer 22 is further provided on the surface of the seed layer. After exposure and development are performed to form a photoresist pattern 23, After the photoresist pattern 23 is removed by applying metal, the seed layer 21 is cut off to produce the metal pattern 24 (metal pattern forming process). Next, the resin pattern 3 is placed between the metal patterns 24 (resin pattern forming process). In addition, after applying the semiconductor element 5 (semiconductor element application process) from the side of the metal pattern 24 opposite to the transparent substrate 1 and irradiating radiation to meet prescribed conditions, the transparent substrate 1 can be peeled off from the laminate 6 (Transparent substrate peeling process). In this embodiment, in particular, the metal pattern forming process, the resin pattern forming process, the semiconductor device application process, and the transparent substrate peeling process are preferred. In addition, in FIG. 2, the same symbols are used for components common to those in FIG. 1 (the same symbols are used for FIG. 3 ). In the second embodiment, a semiconductor device having a metal (for example, metal wiring or electrode) in a gap between a resin pattern (for example, an insulating layer) and a semiconductor element (for example, a semiconductor wafer) in contact with the metal can be obtained. Hereinafter, the second embodiment will be described in more detail.

<金屬圖案形成製程> 本實施方式中,包括形成金屬圖案24之製程。形成金屬圖案之製程中,例如包括種子層形成製程、光阻圖案形成製程、金屬應用製程、光阻圖案及種子層去除製程為較佳。<Metal Pattern Forming Process> In this embodiment, a process of forming the metal pattern 24 is included. In the process of forming the metal pattern, for example, a seed layer forming process, a photoresist pattern forming process, a metal application process, a photoresist pattern, and a seed layer removal process are preferable.

<<種子層形成製程>> 第2實施方式中,於透明基板1的表面設置種子層21。透明基板的詳細內容與第1實施方式相同,較佳範圍亦相同。 種子層藉由濺射、CVD(chemical vapor deposition)、無電解電鍍等而形成為較佳。作為種子層的材料,例示錫、銀、銅。作為種子層的厚度,0.02~2μm為較佳。<<Seed Layer Formation Process>> In the second embodiment, a seed layer 21 is provided on the surface of the transparent substrate 1. The details of the transparent substrate are the same as in the first embodiment, and the preferred range is also the same. The seed layer is preferably formed by sputtering, CVD (chemical vapor deposition), electroless plating, or the like. As the material of the seed layer, tin, silver, and copper are exemplified. The thickness of the seed layer is preferably 0.02 to 2 μm.

<<光阻圖案形成製程>> 第2實施方式中,於種子層21上,較佳為於表面設置光阻層22。接著,對光阻層22進行曝光顯影而形成光阻圖案23。作為光阻圖案的詳細內容,能夠參閱電學論 E,131卷1號,2011年的記載,並將該些內容編入本說明書中。作為光阻層的厚度,0.5~50μm為較佳。<<Photoresist pattern forming process>> In the second embodiment, on the seed layer 21, it is preferable to provide a photoresist layer 22 on the surface. Next, the photoresist layer 22 is exposed and developed to form a photoresist pattern 23. As for the detailed content of the photoresist pattern, please refer to the description of Electric Theory E, Volume 131 No. 1, 2011, and these contents are incorporated into this manual. The thickness of the photoresist layer is preferably 0.5-50 μm.

<<金屬應用製程>> 本實施方式中,具有於具有透明基板1和光阻圖案23之積層體應用金屬之製程為較佳。本實施方式中的金屬應用於具有透明基板1和光阻圖案23之積層體的透明基板1上的光阻圖案的圖案間隙中。作為金屬的應用方法,並無特別限定,可列舉無電解電鍍方法。無電界電鍍方法及金屬的詳細內容與第1實施方式中的金屬應用製程相同,較佳範圍亦相同。如此設置與光阻圖案23對應之金屬圖案24。<<Metal Application Process>> In this embodiment, a process of applying metal to the laminate having the transparent substrate 1 and the photoresist pattern 23 is preferable. The metal in this embodiment is applied to the pattern gaps of the photoresist pattern on the transparent substrate 1 having a laminate of the transparent substrate 1 and the photoresist pattern 23. The application method of the metal is not particularly limited, and an electroless plating method can be mentioned. The details of the electroless plating method and the metal are the same as the metal application process in the first embodiment, and the preferred range is also the same. The metal pattern 24 corresponding to the photoresist pattern 23 is thus arranged.

<<光阻圖案及種子層去除製程>> 形成金屬圖案24之後,去除光阻圖案23。光阻圖案的去除能夠藉由使用溶劑之去除、使用羥基胺基系剝離劑之去除而進行。 去除光阻圖案之後,去除種子層21。種子層21的去除依金屬圖案24的材質進行蝕刻而去除為較佳。<<The photoresist pattern and seed layer removal process>> After the metal pattern 24 is formed, the photoresist pattern 23 is removed. The removal of the photoresist pattern can be performed by removal using a solvent or removal using a hydroxylamine-based release agent. After the photoresist pattern is removed, the seed layer 21 is removed. The seed layer 21 is preferably removed by etching according to the material of the metal pattern 24.

<樹脂圖案形成製程> 接著,於具有透明基板1和金屬圖案24之積層體的表面設置樹脂圖案23。樹脂圖案的製造方法並無特別限定,塗佈樹脂組成物來製造為較佳。作為較佳的實施方式,應用感光性樹脂組成物,並進行顯影曝光而使金屬圖案24露出為較佳。顯影曝光製程的詳細內容能夠參閱第1實施方式的記載。又,塗佈樹脂組成物而作為硬化膜之後,可以研削表面而使金屬圖案24露出。<Resin Pattern Formation Process> Next, the resin pattern 23 is provided on the surface of the laminate having the transparent substrate 1 and the metal pattern 24. The manufacturing method of the resin pattern is not specifically limited, It is preferable to apply|coat a resin composition and manufacture. As a preferred embodiment, it is preferable to apply a photosensitive resin composition and perform development exposure to expose the metal pattern 24. For details of the development exposure process, reference can be made to the description of the first embodiment. Furthermore, after coating the resin composition as a cured film, the surface can be ground to expose the metal pattern 24.

<積層製程> 本實施方式中,可以進一步將金屬圖案24和樹脂圖案3交替積層。<Laminating Process> In this embodiment, the metal pattern 24 and the resin pattern 3 may be alternately laminated.

<半導體元件應用製程> 本實施方式中,進而包括應用半導體元件之製程。該些的詳細內容與第1實施方式中的半導體元件應用製程相同。<Semiconductor element application process> In this embodiment, the process of applying semiconductor elements is further included. These details are the same as the semiconductor device application process in the first embodiment.

<透明基板剝離製程> 本實施方式中,包括從積層體的透明基板側對具有透明基板1和位於上述透明基板的表面之樹脂圖案3之積層體6照射輻射光,並從上述積層體剝離透明基板之剝離製程。該些的詳細內容與第1實施方式中的透明基板剝離製程相同。<Transparent substrate peeling process> In this embodiment, the laminated body 6 having the transparent substrate 1 and the resin pattern 3 located on the surface of the transparent substrate is irradiated with radiation light from the transparent substrate side of the laminated body, and the transparent substrate is peeled off from the laminated body. Substrate peeling process. These details are the same as the transparent substrate peeling process in the first embodiment.

第3實施方式 圖3為表示第3實施方式之示意圖,於透明基板1的表面設置感光性樹脂膜2(感光性樹脂膜製造製程),進行曝光顯影而製造樹脂圖案3(曝光顯影製程)。然後,對樹脂圖案3的不與透明基板1相接之一側應用半導體元件5(半導體元件應用製程)。然後,能夠以滿足規定條件之方式,從透明基板側照射輻射光,藉此能夠剝離透明基板1(透明基板剝離製程)。剝離透明基板1之後,能夠從剝離透明基板1之一側應用金屬4(金屬應用製程)。本實施方式中,尤其依次實施感光性樹脂膜製造製程、曝光顯影製程、半導體元件應用製程、透明基板剝離製程及金屬應用製程為較佳。 第3實施方式中,可得到樹脂圖案(例如,絶縁膜)表面的半導體元件5與樹脂圖案3的間隙的金屬(例如,金屬配線或電極)結合之半導體裝置。以下,對第3實施方式進行具體說明。Third Embodiment Fig. 3 is a schematic view showing a third embodiment. A photosensitive resin film 2 is provided on the surface of a transparent substrate 1 (photosensitive resin film manufacturing process), and exposure and development are performed to manufacture a resin pattern 3 (exposure and development process). Then, the semiconductor element 5 is applied to the side of the resin pattern 3 that is not in contact with the transparent substrate 1 (semiconductor element application process). Then, the transparent substrate 1 can be peeled off by irradiating radiation light from the transparent substrate side in a manner that satisfies the prescribed conditions (transparent substrate peeling process). After the transparent substrate 1 is peeled off, the metal 4 can be applied from one side of the peeled transparent substrate 1 (metal application process). In this embodiment, it is particularly preferable to sequentially implement the photosensitive resin film manufacturing process, the exposure and development process, the semiconductor element application process, the transparent substrate peeling process, and the metal application process in sequence. In the third embodiment, a semiconductor device in which the semiconductor element 5 on the surface of the resin pattern (for example, an insulating film) and the metal (for example, metal wiring or electrode) in the gap between the resin pattern 3 are bonded can be obtained. Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described in detail.

<感光性樹脂膜製造製程> 與第1實施方式的定義相同,較佳範圍亦相同。<Photosensitive resin film manufacturing process> The definition is the same as in the first embodiment, and the preferred range is also the same.

<顯影曝光製程> 與第1實施方式的定義相同,較佳範圍亦相同。<Development exposure process> The definition is the same as in the first embodiment, and the preferred range is also the same.

<硬化製程> 本實施方式中,於顯影曝光製程之後,具有硬化製程為較佳。與第1實施方式的定義相同,較佳範圍亦相同。<Hardening process> In this embodiment, it is preferable to have a hardening process after the development and exposure process. The definition is the same as in the first embodiment, and the preferred range is also the same.

<半導體元件應用製程> 本實施方式中,進而包含應用半導體元件5之製程為較佳。具體而言,設置於樹脂圖案3的表面的和與透明基板1相接之一側相反的一側的表面為較佳。其中,作為半導體元件例示半導體晶片等。<Semiconductor element application process> In this embodiment, it is preferable to further include a process of applying the semiconductor element 5. Specifically, the surface provided on the surface of the resin pattern 3 opposite to the side in contact with the transparent substrate 1 is preferable. Among them, semiconductor wafers and the like are exemplified as semiconductor elements.

<透明基板剝離製程> 本實施方式中,包括從積層體的透明基板側對具有透明基板1和位於上述透明基板的表面之樹脂圖案之積層體6照射輻射光,並從上述積層體剝離透明基板之剝離製程。該些的詳細內容與第1實施方式中的透明基板剝離製程相同。<Transparent substrate peeling process> In this embodiment, the laminated body 6 having the transparent substrate 1 and the resin pattern on the surface of the transparent substrate is irradiated with radiation from the transparent substrate side of the laminated body, and the transparent substrate is peeled from the laminated body The peeling process. These details are the same as the transparent substrate peeling process in the first embodiment.

<金屬應用製程> 本實施方式中,進而於樹脂圖案3的間隙應用金屬為較佳。具體而言,從剝離透明基板1的一側應用金屬為較佳。作為本實施方式中的金屬的應用方法,金屬漿料的印刷為較佳。當金屬為層狀時,金屬層的厚度相當於樹脂圖案的厚度為較佳。藉由該種結構,金屬層作為電極而發揮功能。 作為本實施方式中所使用之金屬,包含選自銅、鋁、鎳、釩、鈦、鉭、鉻、鈷、金、銀及鎢中之至少一種為較佳,當進行金屬漿料的印刷時,銀為較佳。金屬可以係一種亦可以係兩種以上。<Metal Application Process> In this embodiment, it is further preferable to apply metal to the gaps between the resin patterns 3. Specifically, it is preferable to apply metal from the side where the transparent substrate 1 is peeled off. As an application method of metal in this embodiment, printing of metal paste is preferable. When the metal is layered, the thickness of the metal layer is preferably equivalent to the thickness of the resin pattern. With this structure, the metal layer functions as an electrode. As the metal used in this embodiment, it is preferable to include at least one selected from copper, aluminum, nickel, vanadium, titanium, tantalum, chromium, cobalt, gold, silver, and tungsten. When printing a metal paste , Silver is better. The metal can be one type or two or more types.

半導體裝置的製造方法 接著,對半導體裝置的製造方法進行說明。本發明的半導體裝置的製造方法包括本發明的圖案製造方法。尤其,經由以下積層體而製造為較佳。 <積層體1> 一種積層體,其具有透明基板、位於上述透明基板的表面之樹脂圖案及位於上述透明基板的表面上的上述樹脂圖案的間隙之金屬,上述樹脂圖案包含選自聚醯亞胺及聚苯并噁唑中之至少一種。 <積層體2> 一種積層體,其具有透明基板、位於上述透明基板的表面之樹脂圖案、位於上述透明基板的表面上的上述樹脂圖案的間隙之金屬及與上述金屬相接之半導體元件,上述半導體元件於與透明基板側相反的一側與上述金屬相接,上述樹脂圖案包含選自聚醯亞胺及聚苯并噁唑中之至少一種。Method of Manufacturing Semiconductor Device Next, a method of manufacturing a semiconductor device will be described. The manufacturing method of the semiconductor device of the present invention includes the pattern manufacturing method of the present invention. Especially, it is preferable to manufacture through the following laminated body. <Laminate 1> A laminate having a transparent substrate, a resin pattern on the surface of the transparent substrate, and a metal in gaps between the resin patterns on the surface of the transparent substrate, and the resin pattern includes a polyimide selected from And at least one of polybenzoxazole. <Laminate 2> A laminate having a transparent substrate, a resin pattern on the surface of the transparent substrate, a metal in the gaps between the resin patterns on the surface of the transparent substrate, and a semiconductor element in contact with the metal, The semiconductor element is in contact with the metal on the side opposite to the transparent substrate side, and the resin pattern includes at least one selected from polyimide and polybenzoxazole.

半導體裝置的詳細內容能夠參閱日本特開2016-027357號公報的0213~0218段及圖1的記載,並將該些內容編入本說明書中。 [實施例]For details of the semiconductor device, refer to paragraphs 0213 to 0218 of JP 2016-027357 A and the description in FIG. 1, and these contents are incorporated in this specification. [Example]

以下列舉實施例對本發明進行更加具體的說明。以下實施例中所示出之材料、使用量、比例、處理內容、處理流程等於不脫離本發明的宗旨之範圍內,能夠適當進行變更。因此,本發明的範圍並不限定於以下所示之具體例。“份”、“%”於無特別說明之範圍內,係質量基準。The following examples are given to illustrate the present invention more specifically. The materials, usage amount, ratio, processing content, and processing flow shown in the following embodiments are within the scope of the spirit of the present invention, and can be appropriately changed. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. "Parts" and "%" within the range without special instructions are quality standards.

[實施例1] <聚醯亞胺前驅物的合成> <<源自4,4’-氧代二鄰苯二甲酸二酐、4,4’-二氨基二苯醚及2-甲基丙烯酸羥乙酯之聚醯亞胺前驅物Aa-1(具有自由基聚合性基之聚醯亞胺前驅物)的合成>> 將20.0g(64.5毫莫耳)的4,4’-氧代二鄰苯二甲酸二酐(將4,4’-氧代二鄰苯二甲酸於140℃下乾燥12小時而得到者)、18.6g(129毫莫耳)的2-甲基丙烯酸羥乙酯、0.05g的對苯二酚、10.7g的吡啶及140g的二甘醇二甲醚(二乙二醇二甲醚)進行混合。將混合物於60℃的溫度下攪拌18小時而製造了4,4’-氧代二鄰苯二甲酸和2-甲基丙烯酸羥乙酯的二酯。接著,將反應混合物冷卻至-10℃,將溫度保持在-10±4℃的同時經10分鐘添加了16.12g(135.5毫莫耳)的SOCl2 。用50mL的N-甲基吡咯烷酮對反應混合物進行稀釋之後,將反應混合物於室溫下攪拌了2小時。接著,將於100mL的N-甲基吡咯烷酮中溶解有11.08g(58.7毫莫耳)的4,4’-氧代二苯胺之溶液於20~23℃下經20分鐘滴加於反應混合物中。接著,將反應混合物於室溫下攪拌了1晩。接著,向5升水中添加反應混合物而使聚醯亞胺前驅物沉澱。將水及聚醯亞胺前驅物的混合物以5000rpm的速度攪拌了15分鐘。對水及聚醯亞胺前驅物的混合物進行過濾而去除濾液,向4升水中添加了包含聚醯亞胺前驅物之殘渣。將水及聚醯亞胺前驅物的混合物再次攪拌30分鐘,並再次進行過濾而作為殘渣得到了聚醯亞胺前驅物。接著,將所得到之聚醯亞胺前驅物於減壓下,於45℃下乾燥3天而得到了聚醯亞胺前驅物Aa-1。 以下示出聚醯亞胺前驅物Aa-1的結構。 [化學式49]

Figure 02_image097
[Example 1] <Synthesis of polyimide precursor> <<From 4,4'-oxodiphthalic dianhydride, 4,4'-diaminodiphenyl ether and 2-methacrylic acid Synthesis of the polyimide precursor Aa-1 (polyimine precursor with radical polymerizable group) of hydroxyethyl>> 20.0g (64.5 millimoles) of 4,4'-oxodi Phthalic dianhydride (obtained by drying 4,4'-oxodiphthalic acid at 140°C for 12 hours), 18.6 g (129 millimoles) of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 0.05 g of hydroquinone, 10.7 g of pyridine, and 140 g of diglyme (diglyme) were mixed. The mixture was stirred at a temperature of 60°C for 18 hours to produce a diester of 4,4'-oxodiphthalic acid and 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate. Next, the reaction mixture was cooled to -10°C, and 16.12 g (135.5 millimoles) of SOCl 2 was added over 10 minutes while maintaining the temperature at -10±4°C. After the reaction mixture was diluted with 50 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone, the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. Next, a solution of 11.08 g (58.7 millimoles) of 4,4'-oxodiphenylamine dissolved in 100 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone was added dropwise to the reaction mixture at 20-23° C. for 20 minutes. Then, the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for one night. Next, the reaction mixture was added to 5 liters of water to precipitate the polyimide precursor. The mixture of water and polyimide precursor was stirred at a speed of 5000 rpm for 15 minutes. The mixture of water and the polyimide precursor was filtered to remove the filtrate, and the residue containing the polyimide precursor was added to 4 liters of water. The mixture of water and the polyimide precursor was stirred again for 30 minutes and filtered again to obtain the polyimide precursor as a residue. Next, the obtained polyimide precursor was dried under reduced pressure at 45° C. for 3 days to obtain polyimide precursor Aa-1. The structure of the polyimide precursor Aa-1 is shown below. [Chemical formula 49]
Figure 02_image097

<感光性樹脂組成物的製備> 將下述成分進行混合,並作為均勻的溶液而製備了感光性樹脂組成物。<Preparation of photosensitive resin composition> The following components were mixed, and the photosensitive resin composition was prepared as a uniform solution.

<<感光性樹脂組成物A-1的組成>> 感光性樹脂:聚醯亞胺前驅物(Aa-1) 32質量份 聚合性化合物B-1 6.9質量份 光聚合起始劑C-1 1.0質量份 聚合抑制劑:對苯醌(Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.製) 0.08質量份 遷移抑制劑:1H-四唑(Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.製) 0.12質量份 金屬黏附性改良劑:N-[3-(三乙氧基矽基)丙基]馬來酸單醯胺 0.70質量份 溶劑:γ-丁內酯 48.00質量份 溶劑:二甲基亞碸 12.00質量份<<Composition of photosensitive resin composition A-1>> Photosensitive resin: polyimide precursor (Aa-1) 32 parts by mass polymerizable compound B-1 6.9 parts by mass photopolymerization initiator C-1 1.0 Parts by mass polymerization inhibitor: p-benzoquinone (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) 0.08 parts by mass migration inhibitor: 1H-tetrazole (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) 0.12 parts by mass metal adhesion modifier :N-[3-(Triethoxysilyl)propyl]maleic acid monoamide 0.70 parts by mass Solvent: γ-butyrolactone 48.00 parts by mass Solvent: dimethyl sulfide 12.00 parts by mass

各添加劑的詳細內容如下。 B-1:NK酯A-9300(Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.製、3官能丙烯酸酯、下述結構) [化學式50]

Figure 02_image099
The details of each additive are as follows. B-1: NK ester A-9300 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., trifunctional acrylate, the following structure) [Chemical formula 50]
Figure 02_image099

C-1:日本特表2014-500852號公報的0345段中所記載之化合物24 [化學式51]

Figure 02_image101
C-1: Compound 24 described in paragraph 0345 of JP 2014-500852 No. [Chemical formula 51]
Figure 02_image101

<圖案製造方法> 上述感光性樹脂組成物通過細孔寬度為0.8μm的濾波器,並於(0.3MPa)的壓力下,進行了加壓過濾。過濾後,於透明基板(厚度0.6mm的玻璃基板)的表面藉由旋塗法而應用感光性樹脂組成物而形成為層狀,於加熱板上以100℃乾燥5分鐘而得到了10μm的厚度均勻的感光性樹脂膜。 用遮罩(於遮罩面內均勻地具有直径10μm的孔之遮罩、開口率98%)覆蓋包括所得到之透明基板和感光性樹脂膜之積層體的感光性樹脂膜側,並使用步進機(Nikon NSR 2005 i9C),於365nm(i設線)的曝光波長,以500mJ/cm2 的曝光能量進行了曝光。曝光後,用環戊酮將具有曝光部和未曝光部之樹脂膜旋轉清洗60秒鐘而去除了未曝光部(負型顯影)。進而,用丙二醇-1-單乙基醚-2-乙酸酯(PGMEA)進行沖洗而去除了殘渣,從而得到了樹脂圖案。 接著,從室溫進行升溫,且最高加熱溫度達到350℃之後加熱1小時而使樹脂圖案硬化之後,冷卻至室溫。於透明基板的表面得到之樹脂圖案為具有厚度6μm且直徑約10μm的孔之樹脂圖案。 此外,相對於本發明中的感光性樹脂膜的所有區域的表面積之已去除感光性樹脂膜之部分的表面積的比例係按照從100%除以遮罩的開口率之值計算之值。<Pattern Manufacturing Method> The above-mentioned photosensitive resin composition was passed through a filter having a pore width of 0.8 μm, and was subjected to pressure filtration under a pressure of (0.3 MPa). After filtration, the photosensitive resin composition was applied to the surface of the transparent substrate (glass substrate with a thickness of 0.6 mm) by spin coating to form a layer, and dried on a hot plate at 100°C for 5 minutes to obtain a thickness of 10 μm Uniform photosensitive resin film. Cover the photosensitive resin film side of the laminated body including the obtained transparent substrate and photosensitive resin film with a mask (a mask with 10μm diameter holes uniformly in the mask surface, 98% aperture), and use the step The machine (Nikon NSR 2005 i9C) was exposed at an exposure wavelength of 365nm (i set line) and an exposure energy of 500mJ/cm 2 . After the exposure, the resin film having the exposed part and the unexposed part was rotated and cleaned with cyclopentanone for 60 seconds to remove the unexposed part (negative development). Furthermore, it rinsed with propylene glycol-1-monoethyl ether-2-acetate (PGMEA) to remove the residue, and the resin pattern was obtained. Then, the temperature was increased from room temperature, and the maximum heating temperature reached 350° C. After heating for 1 hour to harden the resin pattern, it was cooled to room temperature. The resin pattern obtained on the surface of the transparent substrate is a resin pattern having holes with a thickness of 6 μm and a diameter of about 10 μm. In addition, the ratio of the surface area of the portion from which the photosensitive resin film has been removed to the surface area of all regions of the photosensitive resin film in the present invention is calculated by dividing 100% by the aperture ratio of the mask.

接著,藉由以下的方法形成了無電解鍍銅膜。 作為水溶性有機溶劑,製備包括二乙二醇二乙醚(Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.製)39質量份、水40.75質量份、硝酸(Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.製)20質量份及乙酸鈀(Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.製)0.25質量份之鈀催化劑溶液, 將於上述中得到之包括透明基板和樹脂圖案之積層體於該鈀催化劑溶液中浸漬5分鐘之後,用水進行了清洗。 然後,使用包含Uyemura & Co., Ltd製、THRU-CUP PGT(PGT-A、PGT-B、PGT-C)之下述組成的無電解電鍍液,於無電解電鍍溫度26℃下,進行了60分鐘的無電解電鍍。所得到之無電解鍍銅膜的厚度於樹脂圖案的表面及藉由曝光顯影而露出之透明基板的表面(孔的底部)均為3.0μm。Next, an electroless copper plating film was formed by the following method. As a water-soluble organic solvent, the preparation includes 39 parts by mass of diethylene glycol diethyl ether (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.), 40.75 parts by mass of water, 20 parts by mass nitric acid (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.), and palladium acetate (Manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) 0.25 parts by mass of the palladium catalyst solution, the laminate including the transparent substrate and the resin pattern obtained above was immersed in the palladium catalyst solution for 5 minutes, and then washed with water. Then, using an electroless plating solution containing the following composition of THRU-CUP PGT (PGT-A, PGT-B, PGT-C) manufactured by Uyemura & Co., Ltd, the electroless plating temperature was 26°C. 60 minutes of electroless plating. The thickness of the obtained electroless copper plating film on the surface of the resin pattern and the surface of the transparent substrate exposed by exposure and development (the bottom of the hole) are both 3.0 μm.

<<無電解電鍍浴的原料>> ・蒸留水79.2質量% ・PGT-A 9.0質量% ・PGT-B 6.0質量% ・PGT-C 3.5質量% ・福馬林(Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.:甲醛液)2.3質量%<<Raw material for electroless plating bath>> ・Distilled water 79.2% by mass ・PGT-A 9.0% by mass ・PGT-B 6.0% by mass ・PGT-C 3.5% by mass ・Formalin (Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.: formaldehyde Liquid) 2.3% by mass

為了去除藉由上述曝光顯影而露出之透明基板的表面(孔的底部)以外的部分中所製膜之無電解鍍銅膜,對表面的無電解鍍銅膜進行了研磨。用研磨用清洗液(酸)去除了無電解鍍銅膜。藉由研磨而去除多餘的無電解鍍銅膜,從而得到了於透明基板的表面上的樹脂圖案的間隙(孔部)形成有無電解鍍銅膜的貫通電極之積層體。In order to remove the electroless copper plating film formed on the part other than the surface (bottom of the hole) of the transparent substrate exposed by the above exposure and development, the electroless copper plating film on the surface was polished. The electroless copper plating film was removed with a polishing cleaning solution (acid). The excess electroless copper plating film was removed by polishing, and a laminate in which the through electrode of the electroless copper plating film was formed in the gaps (holes) of the resin pattern on the surface of the transparent substrate was obtained.

關於上述積層體,為了對存在於樹脂圖案的間隙(孔部)中之無電解鍍銅膜中作為銅貫通電極的性能進行確認,進行導通試験,僅選擇合格者而與半導體晶片連接。具體而言,進行半導體晶片的焊料凸塊與所形成之銅貫通電極的對位,藉由回流將半導體晶片連接於銅貫通電極。In order to verify the performance of the electroless copper plating film existing in the gaps (holes) of the resin pattern as the copper through-electrodes for the above-mentioned laminate, a conduction test was performed, and only qualified ones were selected and connected to the semiconductor wafer. Specifically, the solder bumps of the semiconductor chip and the formed copper through electrodes are aligned, and the semiconductor chip is connected to the copper through electrodes by reflow.

從於上述中得到之與半導體晶片連接之積層體的透明基板側,藉由以下方法照射輻射光來從透明基板剝離了積層體。 <<照射條件>> 所照射之輻射光:355nm脈衝(YAG-THG)雷射(脈衝寬度:5ns) ・將對焦於玻璃與樹脂膜的界面之60μm見方的雷射光束(重複頻率50Hz)設為1.5mm/s,並以掃描間距30μm進行了全面掃描。進行了通量1.9J/cm2 的曝光。From the transparent substrate side of the laminated body connected to the semiconductor wafer obtained in the above, the laminated body was peeled from the transparent substrate by irradiating radiation light by the following method. <<Illumination conditions>> Irradiated radiation: 355nm pulse (YAG-THG) laser (pulse width: 5ns) ・Set the 60μm square laser beam (repetition frequency 50Hz) focusing on the interface between glass and resin film It is 1.5mm/s, and the scanning interval is 30μm. An exposure with a flux of 1.9 J/cm 2 was performed.

<樹脂膜的吸光度的測定> 藉由以下方法進行了所照射之輻射光的波長中的樹脂圖案的吸光度的測定。 選擇5處金屬應用前(無電解電鍍前)的沒有透明基板上的樹脂圖案的去除部之部分,測定所照射之輻射光的波長(波長355nm)中的吸光度,並求出了平均值。 吸光度的測定中使用了Hitachi High-Tech Science Corporation製的U-3900。<Measurement of the absorbance of the resin film> The absorbance of the resin pattern in the wavelength of the irradiated radiation was measured by the following method. Five parts were selected before metal application (before electroless plating) without the removal of the resin pattern on the transparent substrate, and the absorbance in the wavelength (wavelength 355nm) of the irradiated radiation was measured, and the average value was calculated. U-3900 manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Science Corporation was used for the measurement of absorbance.

<剝離性> 如以下對自積層體的透明基板的剝離性進行了評價。 A:能夠剝離 B:能夠剝離一部分,但一部分殘留在透明基板 C:未能夠剝離<Releasability> The releasability of the transparent substrate of the self-laminated body was evaluated as follows. A: Peelable B: Partially peelable, but partly remaining on the transparent substrate C: Not peelable

<成品率> 確認剝離後的積層體上的所有半導體晶片的電極連接來對沒有缺陷的比例進行了評價。單位以%表示。<Yield rate> The electrode connection of all the semiconductor wafers on the laminated body after peeling was confirmed, and the ratio of no defects was evaluated. The unit is expressed in %.

[實施例2] 實施例1中,將遮罩變更為開口率係95%的遮罩,除此以外,以與實施例1相同的方式進行。[Example 2] In Example 1, the mask was changed to a mask with an aperture ratio of 95%, and it was performed in the same manner as in Example 1, except that it was changed.

[實施例3] 實施例1中,將遮罩變更為開口率係90%的遮罩,除此以外,以與實施例1相同的方式進行。[Example 3] In Example 1, the mask was changed to a mask with an aperture ratio of 90%, and it was performed in the same manner as in Example 1, except that it was changed.

[實施例4] 實施例1中,將遮罩變更為開口率係80%的遮罩,除此以外,以與實施例1相同的方式進行。[Example 4] In Example 1, the mask was changed to a mask with an aperture ratio of 80%, and it was performed in the same manner as in Example 1, except that it was changed.

[實施例5] 實施例1中,將遮罩變更為開口率係70%的遮罩,除此以外,以與實施例1相同的方式進行。[Example 5] In Example 1, the mask was changed to a mask with an aperture ratio of 70%, and it was performed in the same manner as in Example 1, except that the mask was changed to a mask with an aperture ratio of 70%.

[實施例6] 實施例1中,將感光性樹脂組成物變更為下述感光性樹脂組成物A-2,除此以外,以與實施例1相同的方式進行。 <<感光性樹脂組成物A-2的組成>> 感光性樹脂:聚醯亞胺前驅物(Aa-1) 32質量份 聚合性化合物B-1 6.9質量份 光聚合起始劑C-1 1.0質量份 聚合抑制劑:2,6-二-第三丁基-4-甲基苯酚(Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.製) 0.1質量份 遷移抑制劑:1,2,4-三唑(Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.製) 0.1質量份 溶劑:γ-丁內酯 48.00質量份 溶劑:二甲基亞碸 12.00質量份[Example 6] In Example 1, the photosensitive resin composition was changed to the following photosensitive resin composition A-2, and it was performed in the same manner as in Example 1, except that the photosensitive resin composition was changed to the following photosensitive resin composition A-2. <<Composition of photosensitive resin composition A-2>> Photosensitive resin: polyimide precursor (Aa-1) 32 parts by mass polymerizable compound B-1 6.9 parts by mass photopolymerization initiator C-1 1.0 Parts by mass polymerization inhibitor: 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) 0.1 parts by mass migration inhibitor: 1,2,4-triazole (Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) 0.1 parts by mass solvent: 48.00 parts by mass γ-butyrolactone solvent: 12.00 parts by mass dimethylsulfoxide

[實施例7] 實施例1中,調整可於透明基板的表面得到之樹脂圖案的厚度來將吸光度調整成0.55,除此以外,均以相同的方式進行。[Example 7] In Example 1, the thickness of the resin pattern that can be obtained on the surface of the transparent substrate was adjusted to adjust the absorbance to 0.55, except for this, it was performed in the same manner.

[比較例1] 進行與實施例1相同的流程,而得到了與半導體晶片連接之積層體。對於所得到之積層體,嘗試了不照射輻射光而剝離透明基板,但未能夠剝離。[Comparative Example 1] The same procedure as in Example 1 was performed to obtain a laminate connected to a semiconductor wafer. For the obtained laminate, an attempt was made to peel off the transparent substrate without irradiating the radiation light, but the peeling failed.

[比較例2] 實施例1中,將可於透明基板的表面得到之樹脂圖案的厚度調整成10μm~3μm,除此以外,均以相同的方式進行。然而,未能夠剝離。[Comparative Example 2] In Example 1, the thickness of the resin pattern that can be obtained on the surface of the transparent substrate was adjusted to 10 μm to 3 μm, and other than that, it was performed in the same manner. However, it could not be peeled off.

[比較例3] 於實施例1中,調整可於透明基板的表面得到之樹脂圖案的厚度來將吸光度調整成0.45,除此以外,均以相同的方式進行。[Comparative Example 3] In Example 1, the thickness of the resin pattern that can be obtained on the surface of the transparent substrate was adjusted to adjust the absorbance to 0.45, except for this, it was performed in the same manner.

以下示出上述實施例及比較例的結果。 [表1]

Figure 106118077-A0304-0001
The results of the above-mentioned Examples and Comparative Examples are shown below. [Table 1]
Figure 106118077-A0304-0001

從上述結果明確可知當樹脂圖案的吸光度係0.5以上時,能夠從積層體剝離透明基板。相對於此,當吸光度小於0.5時,能夠從積層體剝離透明基板。From the above results, it is clear that when the absorbance of the resin pattern is 0.5 or more, the transparent substrate can be peeled from the laminate. On the other hand, when the absorbance is less than 0.5, the transparent substrate can be peeled from the laminate.

1‧‧‧透明基板2‧‧‧感光性樹脂膜3‧‧‧樹脂圖案4‧‧‧金屬5‧‧‧半導體元件6‧‧‧積層體7‧‧‧遮罩21‧‧‧種子層22‧‧‧光阻層23‧‧‧光阻圖案24‧‧‧金屬圖案1‧‧‧Transparent substrate 2‧‧‧Photosensitive resin film 3‧‧‧Resin pattern 4‧‧‧Metal 5‧‧‧Semiconductor element 6‧‧‧Laminate 7‧‧‧Mask 21‧‧‧Seed layer 22 ‧‧‧Photoresist layer 23‧‧‧Photoresist pattern 24‧‧‧Metal pattern

1‧‧‧透明基板 1‧‧‧Transparent substrate

2‧‧‧感光性樹脂膜 2‧‧‧Photosensitive resin film

3‧‧‧樹脂圖案 3‧‧‧Resin pattern

4‧‧‧金屬 4‧‧‧Metal

5‧‧‧半導體元件 5‧‧‧Semiconductor components

6‧‧‧積層體 6‧‧‧Layered body

7‧‧‧遮罩 7‧‧‧Mask

Claims (10)

一種圖案製造方法,其包括剝離製程,從積層體A的透明基板側對前述積層體A照射輻射光而從前述積層體A剝離透明基板,該積層體A具有前述透明基板和位於前述透明基板的表面之樹脂圖案,前述樹脂圖案包含選自聚醯亞胺及聚苯并噁唑中之至少一種,所照射之前述輻射光的波長中的前述樹脂圖案的吸光度係0.5以上,並具有如下製程,在前述積層體A的前述透明基板上的前述樹脂圖案的間隙或前述透明基板上的前述透明基板與前述樹脂圖案之間應用金屬。 A pattern manufacturing method, which includes a peeling process, irradiating the layered body A with radiation from the transparent substrate side of the layered body A, and peeling off the transparent substrate from the layered body A, the layered body A having the transparent substrate and the transparent substrate located on the transparent substrate. The resin pattern on the surface, the resin pattern contains at least one selected from polyimide and polybenzoxazole, the absorbance of the resin pattern in the wavelength of the radiated light is 0.5 or more, and has the following manufacturing process: Metal is applied between the gaps of the resin pattern on the transparent substrate of the laminate A or between the transparent substrate and the resin pattern on the transparent substrate. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之圖案製造方法,其中對具有透明基板和感光性樹脂膜之積層體B的前述感光性樹脂膜進行曝光,進而進行顯影處理而去除前述感光性樹脂膜的一部分來得到前述積層體A。 The pattern manufacturing method described in the first item of the patent application, wherein the photosensitive resin film of the laminated body B having a transparent substrate and a photosensitive resin film is exposed, and then a development process is performed to remove a part of the photosensitive resin film Thus, the aforementioned laminate A is obtained. 如申請專利範圍第2項所述之圖案製造方法,其中去除前述感光性樹脂膜的一部分而形成的樹脂圖案中被去除之部分的表面積係前述感光性樹脂膜被曝光的總區域的表面積的20%以下。 The pattern manufacturing method described in the second claim, wherein the surface area of the removed portion of the resin pattern formed by removing a part of the photosensitive resin film is 20% of the surface area of the total area where the photosensitive resin film is exposed %the following. 如申請專利範圍第2項或第3項所述之圖案製造方法,其中前述曝光從前述積層體B的感光性樹脂膜側進行。 The pattern manufacturing method described in the 2nd or 3rd item of the scope of patent application, wherein said exposure is performed from the photosensitive resin film side of said laminated body B. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之圖案製造方法,其中前述金屬包含選自銅、鋁、鎳、釩、鈦、鉭、鉻、鈷、金、銀及鎢中之至少一種。 The pattern manufacturing method according to the first item of the patent application, wherein the aforementioned metal includes at least one selected from copper, aluminum, nickel, vanadium, titanium, tantalum, chromium, cobalt, gold, silver, and tungsten. 如申請專利範圍第2項或第3項所述之圖案製造方法,其中 前述感光性樹脂膜包含選自聚醯亞胺前驅物、聚醯亞胺、聚苯并噁唑前驅物及聚苯并噁唑中之至少一種。 Such as the pattern manufacturing method described in item 2 or item 3 of the scope of patent application, wherein The aforementioned photosensitive resin film includes at least one selected from a polyimide precursor, a polyimide, a polybenzoxazole precursor, and a polybenzoxazole. 如申請專利範圍第2項或第3項所述之圖案製造方法,其中前述感光性樹脂膜包含選自聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物中之至少一種。 The pattern manufacturing method described in item 2 or item 3 of the scope of patent application, wherein the photosensitive resin film contains at least one selected from the group consisting of polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors. 如申請專利範圍第1項至第3項中任一項所述之圖案製造方法,其中在前述曝光顯影製程後且在剝離製程前包括對前述樹脂圖案進行硬化之硬化製程。 The pattern manufacturing method according to any one of items 1 to 3 of the scope of the patent application includes a curing process for curing the resin pattern after the exposure and development process and before the peeling process. 如申請專利範圍第2項或第3項所述之圖案製造方法,其中前述顯影係負型顯影。 The pattern manufacturing method described in item 2 or item 3 of the scope of patent application, wherein the aforementioned development is negative development. 一種半導體裝置的製造方法,其包括申請專利範圍第1項至第3項中任一項所述之圖案製造方法。 A manufacturing method of a semiconductor device, which includes the pattern manufacturing method described in any one of items 1 to 3 of the scope of the patent application.
TW106118077A 2016-06-02 2017-06-01 Pattern manufacturing method, semiconductor device manufacturing method, and laminate TWI709817B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2016111115 2016-06-02
JP2016-111115 2016-06-02

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201807495A TW201807495A (en) 2018-03-01
TWI709817B true TWI709817B (en) 2020-11-11

Family

ID=60477547

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW106118077A TWI709817B (en) 2016-06-02 2017-06-01 Pattern manufacturing method, semiconductor device manufacturing method, and laminate

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6704047B2 (en)
KR (1) KR102138069B1 (en)
TW (1) TWI709817B (en)
WO (1) WO2017209178A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP7169844B2 (en) * 2017-12-15 2022-11-11 旭化成株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured relief pattern, and semiconductor device
JP6933605B2 (en) * 2018-05-21 2021-09-08 信越化学工業株式会社 Pattern formation method
US11682584B2 (en) * 2018-12-26 2023-06-20 Camtek Ltd. Measuring buried layers
EP3919979A1 (en) 2020-06-02 2021-12-08 Imec VZW Resistless patterning mask
KR102600183B1 (en) * 2020-11-27 2023-11-08 주식회사 아큐레이저 Method of transferring Semiconductor Device

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH08255980A (en) * 1995-03-17 1996-10-01 Nec Corp Manufacture of polyimide multilayer wiring board
JP2003231752A (en) * 2002-02-12 2003-08-19 Toyobo Co Ltd Photosensitive polyimide precursor, photosensitive resin composition, color filter, liquid crystal drive side- substrate, and liquid crystal panel

Family Cites Families (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS6298799A (en) * 1985-10-25 1987-05-08 株式会社リコー Formation of multilayer wiring
JPH01159613A (en) * 1987-12-16 1989-06-22 Nec Kansai Ltd Formation of ultrasonic solder pattern
JP2581427B2 (en) * 1993-12-16 1997-02-12 日本電気株式会社 Manufacturing method of polyimide multilayer wiring board
JP2004146426A (en) * 2002-10-22 2004-05-20 Hitachi Ltd Method for manufacturing thin film wiring substrate with electronic part mounted thereon and multi-chip module
JP2004207262A (en) * 2002-12-20 2004-07-22 Fujitsu Ltd Thin-film multilayer circuit board and manufacturing method therefor
JP2009043962A (en) * 2007-08-09 2009-02-26 Sony Corp Method for manufacturing semiconductor apparatus
JP2012069734A (en) * 2010-09-24 2012-04-05 Toshiba Corp Manufacturing method of semiconductor device
JP2013042052A (en) * 2011-08-19 2013-02-28 Nec Corp Manufacturing method for semiconductor device
JP5837381B2 (en) * 2011-09-28 2015-12-24 日東電工株式会社 Manufacturing method of semiconductor device
JP2014011289A (en) 2012-06-29 2014-01-20 Ibiden Co Ltd Electronic component and manufacturing method of electronic component
CN104584214B (en) 2012-09-05 2018-08-03 亮锐控股有限公司 Carrier wafer goes to be bonded from the laser of device wafer
JP2015001655A (en) * 2013-06-17 2015-01-05 東レ株式会社 Laminate resin black matrix substrate

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH08255980A (en) * 1995-03-17 1996-10-01 Nec Corp Manufacture of polyimide multilayer wiring board
JP2003231752A (en) * 2002-02-12 2003-08-19 Toyobo Co Ltd Photosensitive polyimide precursor, photosensitive resin composition, color filter, liquid crystal drive side- substrate, and liquid crystal panel

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2017209178A1 (en) 2019-03-22
KR102138069B1 (en) 2020-07-27
TW201807495A (en) 2018-03-01
WO2017209178A1 (en) 2017-12-07
KR20190003680A (en) 2019-01-09
JP6704047B2 (en) 2020-06-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI736629B (en) Manufacturing method of laminated body and manufacturing method of semiconductor element
TWI830588B (en) Photosensitive resin composition, cured film, laminated body, manufacturing method of cured film, laminated body manufacturing method, and semiconductor element
TWI625232B (en) Laminated body, manufacturing method of laminated body, semiconductor element, and manufacturing method of semiconductor element
CN108137803B (en) Resin, composition, cured film, method for producing cured film, and semiconductor device
TWI758415B (en) Photosensitive resin composition, heterocyclic ring-containing polymer precursor, cured film, laminate, manufacturing method of cured film, and semiconductor device
TWI701271B (en) Photosensitive resin composition and its manufacturing method, cured film, cured film manufacturing method, and semiconductor device
TWI709817B (en) Pattern manufacturing method, semiconductor device manufacturing method, and laminate
TWI728137B (en) Negative photosensitive resin composition, cured film, cured film manufacturing method, semiconductor device, laminated body manufacturing method, semiconductor device manufacturing method, and polyimide precursor
JP6650517B2 (en) Method for producing cured film, method for producing laminate, and method for producing semiconductor element
TWI732893B (en) Negative photosensitive resin composition, cured film, cured film manufacturing method, semiconductor element, laminated body manufacturing method, semiconductor element manufacturing method, and polyimide precursor
JP2016027357A (en) Photosensitive resin composition, cured film, method for producing cured film, and semiconductor device
TWI733882B (en) Manufacturing method of laminated body and manufacturing method of electronic component
JP6901596B2 (en) Manufacturing method of laminate and manufacturing method of semiconductor device
TWI751252B (en) Photosensitive resin composition, cured film, laminate, cured film manufacturing method, laminate manufacturing method, and semiconductor device
TW202131108A (en) Pattern forming method, photosensitive resin composition, manufacturing method of laminate and manufacturing method of electronic component wherein the pattern forming method includes an exposure process and a development process to selectively expose a photosensitive film formed by the photosensitive resin composition
TWI704418B (en) Negative photosensitive resin composition, cured film, cured film manufacturing method, and semiconductor element
TW202112910A (en) Organic film and manufacturing method therefor, composition, laminate, and semiconductor device